Bachelor of

HEALTH SCIENCES

(Audiology/Biomedicine/Dietetics/ Environmental and Occupational Health/Exercise and Sports Science/ Medical Radiation/ Nursing/ Nutrition/Speech Pathology) Diploma in Nursing

SCIENCE (Forensic Science)

Academic Session 2010/2011

Vision Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow

Mission USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions to transform their socio-economic well-being

STUDENT'S PERSONAL PARTICULARS

Full Name

Identification Number Address During Term

Permanent Address

E-mail Address Home Phone Number Cellular Phone Number (if any) School Academic Programme

ii

CONTENTS No. Items Mission and Objective of USM ....... Students Personal Particulars Contents........................................................................................ Academic Calendar ... Senior Officers, Academic and Administrative Staff of the School............................................................................................ Introduction............. Academic System and General Information................................ 2.1 Information on Course Registration 2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit. 2.3 Examination System.. 2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer 2.5 Academic Integrity 2.6 USM Mentor Programme. 2.7 Student Exchange Programme. University Requirements............................................ 3.1 Summary of University Requirements. 3.2 Bahasa Malaysia 3.3 English Language.. 3.4 Local Students Islamic and Asian Civilisations/ Ethnic Relations/Core Entrepreneurship.. 3.5 International Students Malaysian Studies/Option 3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Option Foundation Courses 4.1 Core Courses 4.2 Elective Courses. 4.3 Programme. 4.3.1 Status of Students and Level of Study 4.3.2 Biomedicine Programme 4.3.3 Nursing Programme.. 4.3.4 Forensic Science Programme. 4.3.5 Dietetics Programme. 4.3.6 Medical Radiation Programme. 4.3.7 Audiology Programme. 4.3.8 Speech Pathology Programme.. 4.3.9 Exercise and Sports Science Programme. 4.3.10 Nutrition Programme. 4.3.11 Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Page i ii iii v 1 10 12 12 16 17 21 25 30 30 35 32 32 34 35 37 38 42 42 42 44 44 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 46

1. 2.

3.

4.

iii

5.

Major Programmes 5.1 Biomedicine .. 5.2 Dietetics .. 5.3 Nursing .. 5.4 Forensic Science . 5.5 Medical Radiation . 5.6 Audiology 5.7 Speech Pathology 5.8 Exercise and Sports Science. 5.9 Nutrition.. 5.10 Environmental and Occupational Health..... Courses Synopsis... 6.1 Core Courses Level 100.............. 6.2 Core Courses Level 200 .................... 6.3 Core Courses Level 300 .................... 6.4 Core Courses Level 400 .. Elective Courses . Facilities available at the School General Information About the School .. 9.1 Career Guidance 9.2 Prizes, Awards and Dean's List ... 9.3 Society .. 9.4 Postgraduate Programmes.. 9.5 Overseas Training Scheme .. Diploma of Nursing

48 48 53 57 62 67 71 77 83 87 91 96 97 111 139 172 179 208 209 209 214 214 214 215 216

6.

7. 8. 9.

10.

INDEX. 258 STUDENTS FEEDBACK 272

iv

ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2010/2011 SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES 1. FIRST SEMESTER [Sunday 11 July 2010 - Thursday, 25 November 2010] 20 weeks 8 weeks [Sunday, 11/07/10 - Thursday, 02/09/10] 2 weeks [Friday, 03/09/10 - Saturday, 18/09/10] 6 weeks [Sunday, 19/09/10 - Thursday, 28/10/10] 1 week [Friday, 29/10/10 - Saturday, 06/11/10] 3 weeks [Sunday, 07/11/10 - Thursday, 25/11/10]

Teaching & Learning Period Mid-Semester Break Teaching & Learning Period Revision Week Examination 2. 3.

INTER SEMESTER BREAK [Friday, 26 November 2010 - Saturday, 25 December 2010] - 4 weeks SECOND SEMESTER [Sunday, 26 December 2010 - Thursday, 05 May 2011] - 19 weeks 7 weeks [Sunday, 26/12/10 - Thursday, 27/01/11] 1 week [Friday, 28/01/11 - Saturday, 05/02/11] 9 weeks [Sunday, 06/02/11 - Thursday, 07/04/11] 1 week [Friday, 08/04/11 - Saturday, 16/04/11] 3 weeks [Sunday, 17/04/11 - Thursday, 05/05/11]

Teaching & Learning Period Mid-Semester Break Teaching & Learning Period Revision Week Examination 4. 5.

LONG VACATION [Friday, 06 May 2011 - Saturday, 09 July 2011] - 9 weeks LONG VACATION COURSES [KSCP] 2 weeks [Friday, 06/05/11 - Saturday, 21/05/11] 2 weeks [Sunday, 22/05/11 - Thursday, 02/06/11] 1 week [Sunday, 05/06/11 - Thursday, 09/06/11] 4 weeks [Friday, 10/06/11 - Saturday, 09/07/11]

Holiday Academic Session Examination Long Vacation NOTE:

The Academic Calendar for the Health Campus will start or end earlier due to the differences of weekend holidays. Nuzul Al-Quran [27 August 2010] National Day [31 August 2010] Hari Raya Puasa [10 - 11 September 2010] Hari Deepavali [05 November 2010] Hari Raya Qurban [17 - 18 November 2010] Awal Muharam [07 December 2010] Christmas [25 December 2010] Chinese New Year [03 - 04 February 2011] Birthday of Prophet Muhammad S.A.W [15 February 2011] Birthday of D.Y.M.M Sultan of Kelantan [30 - 31 March 2011]

SENIOR OFFICERS OF THE SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES

ACADEMIC & ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF OF THE SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES Tel: 609-764 7880/609 7677509/7510/7518 Fax:609-7677515
NO. 1. 2. NAME Professor Ahmad Haji Zakaria Associate Professor Pim Chau Dam POSITION Dean Deputy Dean Academic & Student Development /Quality Management Representative Deputy Dean Research & Graduate Studies/Coordinator ISO/IEC 17025 Deputy Dean Division of Industry & Community Network/Quality Coordinator TELEPHONE 7500 7502 EMAIL ahmadz@kb.usm.my pimcd@kb.usm.my

3.

Dr. Zafarina Zainuddin

7616

zafarina@kck.usm.my

4.

Associate Professor Shaharum Shamsuddin

7501

shaharum@kb.usm.my

NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

NAME Professor Dinsuhaimi Sidek Dr. Mohd Normani Zakaria Dr. Zuraida Zainun (Study Leave) Dr. Nik Adilah Nik Othman Pn. Aw Cheu Lih Dr. Lim Boon Huat Professor Norazmi Mohd. Nor Professor Syed Mohsin Syed Sahil Jamalullail

AUDIOLOGY PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Programme 6428/6429 Chairman/ Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7646 Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7559 7571

EMAIL suhaimi@kb.usm.my mdnorman@kk.usm.my zuraida@kb.usm.my adilah@kk.usm.my awcheulih@kck.usm.my limbh@kb.usm.my norazmi@kb.usm.my smohsin@kb.usm.my

Lecturer 6432 BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME Programme 7619 Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Lecturer 7605 Dean Biomedical & Health Sciences Research Platform, USM /Lecturer 2362

NO. 9.

NAME Professor Zainul Fadziruddin Zainuddin Professor Zalina Ismail

BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Director Innovation Office USM/Lecturer Coordinator Centre for Neurocognitive Science, BRAINetwork/ Lecturer Lecturer Deputy Dean Academic and Student Development / Quality Management Representative/ Senior Lecturer Deputy Dean Division of Industry & Community Network/ Quality Coordinator / Senior Lecturer Coordinator Health Informatic/ Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Coordinator Science Laboratory Management Unit/Senior Lecturer 7569

EMAIL dir_inov@usm.my

10.

zalina@kb.usm.my

11. 12.

Associate Professor Farid Che Ghazali Associate Professor Pim Chau Dam

7539 7502/7612

farid@kb.usm.my pimcd@kb.usm.my

13.

Associate Professor Shaharum Shamsuddin

7504/7615

shaharum@kb.usm.my

14.

Associate Professor Sharifah Mastura Syed Mohamad Dr. Noor Izani Noor Jamil Dr. Few Ling Ling Dr. Mohd Dasuki Haji Sulain Dr. Nik Norliza Nik Hassan En. Nor Azmi Zainal Dr. Rapeah Suppian Dr. See Too Wei Cun

7568

sharifah@kck.usm.my

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

7604 7536 7581 7532 7547 7613 7537

noorizani@kck.usm.my fewling@kck.usm.my drdasuki@kb.usm.my nnorliza@kb.usm.my nazmi@kb.usm.my rapeah@kck.usm.my stweicun@kb.usm.my

NO. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

NAME Dr. Shyamoli Mustafa Dr. Tee Get Bee @ Yvonne Dr. Hasmah Abdullah Dr. Hermizi Hapidin Dr. Wan Amir Nizam Wan Ahmad (Study Leave) Dr. Wan Nor Azilah @ Wan Nor Amilah Wan Abdul Wahab En. Zamri Ibrahim Dr. Zefarina Zulkafli (Study Leave) Pn. Wan Ezumi Mohd Puad @ Mohd Fuad Associate Professor Shariza Abdul Razak En. S. Daniel Robert Dr. Sakinah Harith Dr. Marina Abdul Manaf Pn. Rehanah Mohd. Zain Associate Professor Siti Hawa Ali (Study Leave) Associate Professor Mohd Isa Haji Bakar En. Mohd Zulkifli Abdul Rahim (Study Leave) Dr. Rosminah Mohamed Pn. Hjh. Wan Aminah Haji Hasbullah

BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Senior Lecturer 7565 Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer 7597 7534 7634 7552 7543 7626

EMAIL shyamoli@kb.usm.my yvonne@kb.usm.my hasmah@kck.usm.my hermizi@kck.usm.my wanamir@kb.usm.my dramilah@kk.usm.my zamri@kb.usm.my zefarina@kb.usm.my wanezumi@kk.usm.my

31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

DIETETICS PROGRAMME Programme 7638 Chairperson/ Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7635 Senior Lecturer 7637 Lecturer 7617 ELECTIVE PROGRAMME Programme 7564 Chairman (Acting) / Senior Lecturer Lecturer 7570 Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer 7555 7586 7566

shariza@kb.usm.my daniel@kb.usm.my sakinah@kck.usm.my mareena@kk.usm.my rehanah@kb.usm.my

36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

hawali@kb.usm.my mohdisa@kb.usm.my mdzul@kck.usm.my rosminah@kb.usm.my waminah@kb.usm.my

NO. 41.

NAME Dr. Nik Fariza Husna Nik Hassan (Study Leave) Cik Supaletchimi Katherason Dr. Lim Phaik Hooi Pn. Che Rabiaah Mohamed Pn. Jayah K. Pubalan Cik Kasmah Wati Pardi Cik Radziah Mohd Fauzi Pn. Rahimah Mohd Anshari Pn. Sabarishah Hashim (Study Leave) Pn. Dariah Mohd Yusoff (Study Leave) Cik Norazliah Hj Samsudin Pn. Rosmawati Mohamed Dr. Soon Lean Keng Pn. Intan Idiana Hassan Pn. Zakira Mamat @ Mohamed (Study Leave) Pn. Hartini Muhamad Cik Nik Asiah Nik Lah Pn. Nik Nor Azlina Abd. Kadir Cik Siti Aishah Haji Ghazali Pn. Zahniyah Che Ishak

ELECTIVE PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Lecturer NURSING PROGRAMME Programme 7540 Chairman (Acting) / Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7652 Senior Lecturer 7577 Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor 7550 7533 7588 7558 7557 7611 7546 7636 7554 7735 7735 7738 7737 7736

EMAIL

42.

supa0026@kb.usm.my

43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60.

limph@kb.usm.my crabiaah@kck.usm.my jayahkp@kck.usm.my kasmah@kb.usm.my radziah@kb.usm.my rahimahm@kb.usm.my risha@kck.usm.my dariah@kb.usm.my azliah@kck.usm.my roswati@kck.usm.my soonlk@kb.usm.my idiana@kk.usm.my zakira@kck.usm.my tini@kck.usm.my nikasiah@kck.usm.my nikazlina@kck.usm.my schah@kck.usm.my zahniyah@kck.usm.my

NO. 61. 62. 63. 64.

65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80.

ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Dr. Rohasliney Programme 7598 rohasliney@kck.usm.my Hashim Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Dr. Haliza Abdul Senior Lecturer 7535 haliza@kb.usm.my Rahman Dr. Maliki Hapani Senior Lecturer 7625 maliki@kck.usm.my Dr. Hj. Mohd Senior Lecturer 7650 drnazhari@kk.usm.my Nazhari Hj. Mohd Nawi SPEECH PATHOLOGY PROGRAMME Cik Azlinda Abd. Programme 7592 azlinda@kck.usm.my Ghani Chairman/ Lecturer En. Khairy Anuar Lecturer 7614 khairy@kck.usm.my Mohd Khairuddin Pn. Norhaniza Lecturer 7538 norhaniza@kck.usm.my Abdul Khairi NUTRITION PROGRAMME Professor Wan Programme 7648 wanmanan@kb.usm.my Abdul Manan Wan Chairman/ Muda Lecturer Dr. Foo Leng Huat Senior Lecturer 7548 lhfoo@kb.usm.my Dr. Hamid Jan Jan Senior Lecturer 7618 hamidjan@kb.usm.my Mohamad Dr. Wan Rosli Wan Senior Lecturer 7649 wrosli@kck.usm.my Ishak @ Wan Ahmad Dr. Soo Kah Leng Senior Lecturer 7631 sookl@kk.usm.my Dr. Norfarizan Lecturer 7633 nhanoon@kk.usm.my Hanoon Noor Azmi EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME Dr. Mohamed Saat Programme 7602 matsaat@kb.usm.my Ismail Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Dr. Yusoff Ismail Senior Lecturer 7600 dryusoff@kck.usm.my En. Erie Zuraidee Lecturer erie@kck.usm.my Zulkifli (Study Leave) En. Nurul Azuar Lecturer 7641 nazuar@kb.usm.my Hamzah Pn. Vina Tan Phei Lecturer 7580 vina@kb.usm.my Sean Dr. Md. Ariff Ikram Lecturer 7622 ariff@kb.usm.my Zakaria Dr. Oleksandr Lecturer 7585 olek@kb.usm.my Krasilshchikov

NO. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95.

96. 97.

EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Dr. Soumendra Lecturer 7599 drsoumen@kk.usm.my Saha MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME Pn. Chen Suk Programme 7639 chensc@kb.usm.my Chiang Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Professor Ahmad Dean/ 7500 ahmadz@kb.usm.my Haji Zakaria Lecturer Associate Professor Lecturer 7556 jamel_basha@yahoo.com Dr. Mohamad Jamel Basha Adlan Dr. Arefuddin Senior Lecturer 7567 aref@kb.usm.my Ahmed En. Mohd Fahmi Lecturer 7576 mfahmi@kb.usm.my Mohd Yusof Cik Siti Aishah Lecturer 7623 ishah@kb.usm.my Abdul Aziz FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME Dr. Mohamad Programme 7553 hadzri@kb.usm.my Hadzri Yaacob Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Associate Professor Lecturer 7583 rkuppuswamy@kb.usm. my Dr. R. Kuppuswamy Associate Professor Lecturer 7582 waliullah@kb.usm.my Dr. Sayed Waliullah Shah Associate Professor Senior Lecturer 7601 ptjaya@kb.usm.my Dr. P.T. Jayaprakash Dr. Nik Senior Lecturer 7621 nikf@kb.usm.my Fakhuruddin Nik Hassan En. S. Senior Lecturer 7587 panneer@kb.usm.my Panneerchelvam En. T. Nataraja Senior Lecturer 7589 nadaraja@kb.usm.my Moorthy Dr. Zafarina Deputy Dean 7616 zafarina@kck.usm.my Zainuddin Research & Graduate Studies/ Coordinator ISO/IEC 17025 /Senior Lecturer Dr. Affizal Ahmad Senior Lecturer 7595 affizal@kb.usm.my Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Senior Lecturer 7596 fahmilim@kb.usm.my Lim Abdullah

NO. 98. 99. 100. 101. 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116.

DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Pn. Norizam Programme 7734 nrizam@kck.usm.my Muhammad Yusof Chairman (Acting) /Tutor Pn. Noor Aini Senior Lecturer 7531 nooraini@kb.usm.my Hussain Pn. Anisah Mat Tutor 7744 anisahmd@kck.usm.my Desa Pn. Azlida Abd Tutor 7733 azlida@kck.usm.my Kadir Pn. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 fazdillah@kck.usm.my Pn. Hasni Embong Tutor 7741 ehasni@kck.usm.my Pn. Low Kim Lian Tutor 7747 kimlian@kck.usm.my Pn. Mas Nor Saloni Tutor 7732 mnsaloni@kck.usm.my Ibrahim Pn. Noor Jasmani Tutor 7746 nrjasmani@kck.usm.my Hassan Pn. Nor Rahan Tutor 7749 norrahan@kk.usm.my Mohamad Pn. Norliza Hussin Tutor 7745 norliza@kck.usm.my Pn. Nurhayati Tutor 7742 hayatimn@kck.usm.my Mohamad Nor Pn. Tuan Ruasmani Tutor 7750 ruasmani@kk.usm.my Tuan Daud Pn. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 zuraida@kck.usm.my Pn. Chu Be Lai Clinical Instructor 6672 chubelai@kck.usm.my Pn. Halizan Yusof Clinical Instructor 6672 Pn. Masturah Clinical Instructor 6672 Hamzah Pn. Norizan Che Clinical Instructor 6672 eijann@kck.usm.my Mohd Yusoff Pn. Zaharah Clinical Instructor 6672 Muhamad

The School of Health Sciences is also supported by academic staff from the School of Medical Sciences, School of Dental Sciences, School of Physics, School of Social Science, School of Mathematics, School of Distance Education and external lecturers from Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Universiti Putra Malaysia, the Royal Malaysian Police, Department of Chemistry Malaysia and the Fire and Rescue Department of Malaysia.

NO. 1. 2. 3.

NAME En. Md. Lukmi Ismail En. Hera Jauhar Lal Singh a/l Kishen Singh Pn. Wan Suriati Wan Nik

ADMINISTRATION POSITION TELEPHONE Chief Science 7541 Officer Senior Science 7629 Officer Research & Graduate Studies (Research) / Senior Science Officer Senior Assistant Registrar (Administrative) Assistant Registrar (Academic) Assistant Registrar Research & Graduate Studies (RLKA & Graduate) 7545

EMAIL mdlukmi@kb.usm.my hera@kb.usm.my wsuriati@kck.usm.my

4. 5. 6.

Pn. Nor Zarinah Ismail Cik Mirawaty Mat Ghani En. Rohasreyn Hashim

7507 7516 7522

zarinah@kb.usm.my mirawaty@kck.usm.my rohasreyn@kk.usm.my

1.

INTRODUCTION

Background The treatment and prevention of diseases have long been the foundation of conventional thoughts in matters of health. These thoughts have undergone changes, albeit slowly, towards the concept of a more holistic management of health, based not only on the biology of diseases but also incorporating aspects of sociological sciences, behavior and the environment. This concept of health gives cognizance not only to patients but to the healthy individual as well. Rapid advancement in technology has help to hasten these changes in concepts, methodologies and the way health services are disbursed. These facts are taken into account during the development of programmes at the School of Health Sciences with the expressed intention of producing graduates who would be able to compete in the job market both locally and at the international level. With these principles as its foundations, the School of Health Sciences USM was established at the Health Campus in Kelantan on the 1st of November 1999. The School's main objective is to holistically expand the Health Sciences disciplines. Within the ambit of Health Sciences are included areas of specialties like Biomedicine, Dietetics, Nursing, Forensic Science, Medical Radiation, Exercise and Sports Science, Audiology, Speech Pathology, Nutrition and Environmental Health. In addition, several other potential health related subjects will also be offered in due course. Thus the establishment of the School of Health Sciences is a direct effort by USM to help fulfill the national requirement for manpower in the areas of health and paramedical disciplines which is currently experiencing a severe shortage of trained personnels. The 2010/2011 academic session is the tenth for the School. Since the academic session 2002/2003, six batches of students have graduated from various programmes. In the academic session 2007/2008, the School of Health Sciences saw another milestone with the reintroduction of Diploma in Nursing which was previously offered under the School of Medical Sciences. All programmes offered at the School of Health Sciences will be of four (4) years duration (eight semesters). At the end of the programmes, graduates will be conferred the Bachelor of Health Sciences (BHSc) (Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains Kesihatan) for their respective disciplines with the exception of the Forensic Science programme which will be conferred the Bachelor of Science (Forensic Science) [Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains (Sains Forensik)] degree. Meanwhile, graduates from the Diploma in Nursing Programme will be conferred a Diploma in Nursing.

10

Philosophy The School of Health Sciences has a philosophy that values education as the driving force behind the progress and development of mankind. We are committed to producing graduates who are able to pursue their own goals and direction while contributing to the development of an industrialised and civilised Malaysia. To fulfil the above aspiration, the School provides an education that is sustainable, futures-oriented and globally focused. The School adopts a diverse and comprehensive interdisciplinary wellness-based programme for educational, scientific and human capital development. The curriculum provides the foundation for intellectual inquiry as well as a pragmatic contribution focused on the wellness of individuals and communities. As a consequence, the teachinglearning methods are focused on integrative problem-solving where students are encouraged to make group decisions that have a local emphasis with globalised consequences. Thus, the School of Health Sciences is committed to the promotion of scholarship that has a foundation in scientific thinking, and professional interdisciplinary education supported by a strong research culture. This will enable our graduates to respond to the challenges of the 21st century with a sense of social consciousness and accountability. This effort is expected to uplift the nation status towards attainment of being an advanced nation by the year 2020. Excellence is regarded as the foundation of this noble effort. Vision We are committed to be a centre of excellence in health sciences towards the wellness of society through intellectual inquiry, creativity, innovation and dissemination of knowledge. Mission To achieve and maintain excellence in health sciences by: Producing graduates with a high level of intellectual inquiry and professionalism. Developing graduates with a strong sense of ethics and commitment to humanity. Transforming knowledge into an instrument for sustainable development and wellness of society.

11

2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION 2.1 Information on Course Registration Students are reminded that course registration is official and final. As such, the following details need to be checked carefully to avoid any errors, which can lead to problems: Course code Units Classification of course Class timetables Course prerequisite Conditions imposed by the School Maximum and minimum units allowed for registration

Academic Advisory (i) (ii) Students should plan their courses for the entire duration of their studies. Students should meet and discuss their course registration with their academic advisor.

The following information can be obtained from Healthy Campus (Kampus Sejahtera) (www.healthycampus.usm.my) Portal prior to the registration activity. Academic advisory information Academic information such as academic status, GPA, CGPA, and year of study Cumulative Statement of Grades (CANGRED) List of courses offered in all Schools/Centres Teaching and learning timetables for all Schools/Centres

E-Daftar (E-Registration) E-Daftar allows USMs First Degree and Diploma students to register courses through websites that can be accessed from USMs Healthy Campus (Kampus Sejahtera) Portal. The students with active academic status and those that do not have any case that is still pending with the University are allowed to register courses through E-Daftar. The period of registration under E-Daftar for Semester I usually starts on the second week of June until a day before the start of Semester I whereas the period for Semester II usually starts two days before Semester I 'provisional' exam result is released until a day before Semester II starts. The actual period of registration under E-Daftar will be announced by the office of the Data & Record Processing Unit (DRPU) (Unit Pemprosesan Data & Rekod), usually during the Revision Week of every semester and will be displayed on the school/centres/hostels bulletin board and in USMs website.

12

Under E-Daftar, students can register all the courses except co-curriculum courses. Preregistration of co-curriculum courses is usually conducted during the second half of the preceding semester by the office of Co-Curriculum Programme (the Division of Academic & International Affairs). Co-curriculum courses will be included in the registration account of the students prior to the E-Daftar activity, only if their preregistration application is successful. The course registration activity is managed by the office of Data & Record Processing Unit (DRPU), Academic Management Section, Registry Department (04-6532925/ 04-6533169/04-6534195). On-line Course Registration Activity On-line Course Registration (OCR) (Pendaftaran Kursus Dalam Talian) is meant for students on Probation status (P1/P2) and students who could not participate in the registration activity under the E-Daftar system. OCR is usually conducted on the first day of the semester. Each school is responsible for scheduling this activity. Students must refer to the schedule at their respective school notice boards. Prior to OCR, students are required to get the following documents from Healthy Campus Portal/School/Centre: (i) (ii) (iii) Course Registration Form Cumulative Statement of Grades (CANGRED) Students must obtain the signature of their Academic Advisor for the courses they intend to register under OCR

Class Timetable and List of Courses Offered The class timetable and list of courses offered will be prepared by the respective schools and displayed on the notice boards. Students must refer to both of them before selecting their courses. Students are not allowed to register for courses where there is overlapping of lecture hours. Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses (i) All matters pertaining to the registration, adding or dropping of Language and co-curriculum courses will be managed by the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation and the office of Co-Curriculum Programme (the Division of Academic & International Affairs) respectively. Pre-registration of co-curriculum courses is conducted by the office of Co-Curriculum Programme (the Division of Academic & International Affairs) usually during the second half of the preceding semester.

(ii)

13

(iii)

After the selection process (for curriculum courses), successful candidates will have their courses registered automatically into the system before the E-Daftar and the on-line course registration activities begin. If there is a need to drop any course (Language and co-curriculum courses), it must be done within the first week of the semester. A penalty of RM50.00 will be imposed if a course is dropped after the first week.

(iv)

Classification of Types of Courses Students are allowed to register for any course provided they fulfill the mandatory pre-requisites of the course. Registration of courses to fulfill the requirements of a programme of study is classified into the following course code types: T - Core (Major) Courses E - Elective Courses M - Minor Courses U - University Courses --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Y - Audit courses which are taken solely Performance/grades of these for acquiring knowledge courses will not contribute to the overall calculation of Z - Special courses for which a minimum grade point average, and total 'C' grade (Pass) is required before being number of credits required allowed to proceed to a higher level for graduation course (as a prerequisite) Maximum and Minimum Units Allowed for Registration per Semester (a) Course Registration by "Active" Students The minimum and maximum units allowed for registration in each semester are as follows: Minimum Maximum 9 (i) 20

The maximum limit permitted includes units for co-curriculum and repeated courses. Students are allowed to exceed this maximum limit for Practical Training/Teaching Practice/Industrial Training which are conducted during the long vacation. The maximum and minimum units are final. Deans cannot waive this ruling at their discretion. However they have the prerogative to allow a student to register less than the minimum units allowed, although this is only for those students who have exceeded the minimum residential requirement.

(ii)

14

(b)

Course Registration by "Probationary" Students The minimum and maximum units allowed for registration in each semester by "Probationary" students are as follows: Academic Status Probation I (P1) Probation II (P2) Maximum Units 12 10

Course Verification Slip The verification slip issued to students after the course registration must be checked carefully to ensure that there are no errors. If there are any errors regarding courses registered, corrections must be done immediately in E-Daftar system/at the respective schools during the registration period. Adding of Courses/Late Registration Adding of courses without a valid reason is not allowed after the registration period. However, consideration may be given as follows: (i) Adding of courses/late registration, with valid reasons, may be approved by the Dean/Deputy Dean in the first and second week only, and is subject to a penalty of RM50.00. Adding of courses during the third week, with valid reasons, may be recommended by the Dean/Deputy Dean before forwarding to The Data Processing & Records Unit, subsequently for consideration by the Deputy Vice Chancellor (Academic), and is subject to a penalty of RM 50.00. Requests for adding of courses after the third week will not be entertained.

(ii)

(iii)

Dropping of Courses Students are allowed to drop courses by the sixth week on condition that they have abided by the ruling stipulated by the University, as follows: (i) The student must complete the relevant form to drop the course, with the recommendation of the lecturer and the Deans approval, and then submit the form to the Examinations Unit. A student intending to drop a Language course must obtain the signature and stamp of the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation as well as the signature and stamp of the Dean in his/her School.

(ii)

15

(iii)

A student intending to drop a co-curriculum course must obtain the signature and stamp of the Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Academic & International Affairs) as well as the signature and stamp of the Dean in his/her School. This privilege to drop a course should not be abused. A lecturer at his/her discretion can not recommend a student's request to drop a course if the student has not been serious about the course, e.g. not attending lectures, tutorials, practical training or not doing the coursework. In such cases, students can be barred from taking the examination, given a grade of 'X', and hence not allowed to take the course during the long vacation (KSCP).

(iv)

Updating of Academic Records The student's academic record details are printed in the "CANGRED". They are advised to check these details and if they find any incorrect details, they can update the information by using specific forms, which are available at their respective School or at the Data Processing & Records Unit (Level 5, Chancellory Building). Students should inform their respective School and the Data Processing & Records Unit of any change in their semester, permanent and/or emergency addresses. 2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit (a) Unit Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is determined by the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students. In general, a unit is defined as follows: Type of Course Theory Practical/Laboratory Language Proficiency Industrial Training/ Teaching Practice (b) Contact Contact is defined as formal face to face meeting between the academic staff and his/her students and it may take the form of lectures, tutorials, seminar, laboratory and field work. Definition of Unit 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester. 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester. 1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training.

16

(c)

Accumulated Credit Unit Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students must accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the programme concerned.

2.3 Examination System Examination would be held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for the examination of courses they have registered. Students are required to settle all fees due and fulfill the standing requirements for lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before being allowed to sit for the examination of courses they registered. Course evaluation will be based on two components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in tutorials. Duration of Examination Evaluated Courses 2 units Examination Duration 1 hour for coursework of more than 40% 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below 2 hours for coursework of more than 40% 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below

2 units
3 units or more 3 units or more Barring from Examination

Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they did not satisfy course requirements such as absence from lectures and tutorials, and have not completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework. Students also will be barred from sitting the final examination if they have not settled the academic fees. A grade 'X' would be awarded for a course in which a student is barred. Grade Point Average System Student evaluation achievement for courses registered will be as follows:
Alphabetic Grade Grade Points A 4.00 A3.67 B+ 3.33 B 3.00 B2.67 C+ 2.33 C 2.00 C1.67 D+ 1.33 D 1.00 D0.67 F 0

Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP (See below) or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for a particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course. The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any semester. 17

CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from one semester to another during the years of study. The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:

Ui Mi
Grade Point Average = i=1 n

Ui i=1

where n = Number of courses taken Ui = Course units for course i Mi = Grade point for course i Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Course ABC XX1 ABC XX2 BCD XX3 CDE XX4 EFG XX5 EFG XX6 Unit 4 4 3 4 3 2 20 Grade Point (GP) 3.00 2.33 1.67 2.00 1.33 2.67 Grade (G) B C+ CC D+ BTotal GP 12.00 9.32 5.01 8.00 3.99 5.34 43.66

Semester I:

GPA =

43.66 20 = 2.18
Unit 3 4 4 4 3 18 Grade Point (GP) 1.00 2.33 2.00 2.67 3.33 Grade (G) D C+ C BB+ Total GP 3.00 9.32 8.00 10.68 9.99 40.99

Semester II:

Course ABC XX7 ABB XX8 BBC XX9 BCB X10 XYZ XX1

GPA =

40.99 18 = 2.28

Total Accumulated GP 43.66 + 40.99 84.65 CGPA = Total Accumulated Unit = = 38 = 2.23 20 + 18 From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point accumulated for all the courses registered divided by the total number of units registered. 18

Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti panjang) (KSCP) KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and obtained a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who have obtained 'X' or 'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during KSCP. The purpose of KSCP is to: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for graduation. Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for graduation. Assist "probationary" students to redeem their academic status. Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which is not offered in the following semester.

However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses that they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above, provided that the course is being offered. Usually, formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials. The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is available in the University's Academic Calendar. KSCP Implementation (a) (b) Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and the total number of units registered must not exceed 10. Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the best marks/grades obtained for a particular course in the normal semester. The final overall grade is determined as follows: Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade + Marks or grade for KSCP examination (c) GPA calculation involves the LATEST grade (obtained in KSCP) and also involves courses taken in the second semester and those repeated in KSCP. If the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is 2.00 or better, the academic status is active even though the academic status for the second semester was probation. However if the GPA for KSCP (as calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status is as for the second semester. Graduating students (those that have fulfilled the graduation requirements) in the second semester are not allowed to register for KSCP.

(d)

19

Academic Status Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for any examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be allowed to pursue his/her studies for the following semester. Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves a GPA of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for three consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies at the university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student concerned will be allowed to pursue his studies and will be maintained at P2 status. Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University Examination Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's studies if his/her achievement do not satisfy and fulfill the accumulated minimum credit in line with the number of semesters completed by the student as given in the table below. Number of Semesters End of 2 semester End of 4 semester End of 6 semester End of 8 semester
th th th nd

Total Accumulated Minimum Credit Units Pure 15 35 55 75 Applied 15 35 55 75 Professional 16 38 60 80

The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any student's studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered for the courses, has not taken his/her examination card, does not produce it in an examination without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons can be disqualified from pursuing his/her studies. Examination Result A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899) would be released and announced after the School Examination Council meeting and presumably one month after examination. Full result (grade) through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899) will be released and announced after the University Examination Council meeting and is usually two weeks after the provisional results are released. The official semester results (SEMGRED) will be issued to students during the second week of the following semester.

20

2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer Definition of Unit Exemption Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students who are pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the graduation requirements. Students only need to accumulate the remaining units for graduating purpose. Only passes or course grades accumulated or acquired in USM will be included in the calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for graduation purpose. Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption (a) Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions of Higher Learning: (i) (ii) Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at diploma level. Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or more combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one course at degree level. However if the School would like to approve only one course at the diploma level for unit exemption of one course at degree level, the course at diploma level must be equivalent to the degree course and has the same or more units. Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma holders cannot be considered for unit exemption. The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be considered for unit exemption is at least 'C' grade or 2.0 or equivalent. The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed two semesters. In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a student must have work experience continuously for at least two years in the area. If the student has undergone industrial training during the diploma level study, a student must have work experience for at least one year. The students are also required to produce the report on the level and type of work performed. Industrial training unit exemption cannot be considered for semester exemption as the industrial training is carried out during the long vacation in USM.

(iii) (iv) (v) (vi)

(vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only be given for courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400). English Language, Islamic and Asian Civilisations as well as co-curriculum.

21

(b)

IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Learning) USM Supervised/External Diploma Graduates (i) Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma graduates are given unit exemption as stipulated by the specific programme of study. Normally, unit exemption in this category is given as a block according to the agreement between USM (through School that offers the programme) with the IPTS.

(c)

Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institution of Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the first degree level may apply to study in this university and if successful, can be considered for unit exemptions subject to the following conditions: (i) (ii) Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least 50% of the course must be the same) with courses offered in USM. Students taking courses at advanced diploma level in IPT that is recognised to be equivalent to the first degree course at USM, may be considered for unit exemption as in (c)(i). The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed one third of the total unit requirement for graduation.

(iii)

Total Number of Exempted Semesters Semester exemption is based on the total unit exempted that is equivalent to a semester for a particular programme. Program Units Required for Graduation 100 - 126 Total Number of Units Exempted < 15 3 Year 15 - 29 > 29 < 16 4 Year 130 - 150 16 - 32 > 32 Total Number of Semester Exempted None 1 2 None 1 2

22

Definition of Credit Transfer Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of a total number of credits obtained by USM students taking courses in other IPTA (Public Institution of Higher Learning) within the period of study at USM, and is combined with credits obtained at USM to fulfil units requirement for his/her programme of study. The transfered examination result or grades obtained in courses taken at other IPTA will be combined in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) calculation. Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer USM full-time first degree level students who would like to attend specific first degree level courses at other IPTA. USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific diploma level courses at other IPTA. Conditions (a) Basic and Core Courses (i) Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained from other courses in other IPTA that are equivalent (at least 50% of the content are the same) with the courses offered by the programme. Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have the same number of units or more. For equivalent courses but with less number of units, credit transfers can be approved by combining a few courses. Credits transferred are the same as the course units as offered in USM. Average grade of the combined course will be taken into account in CGPA calculation.

(ii)

(b)

Elective or Option Courses (i) (ii) Students may attend any appropriate courses in other IPTA subject to permission from the School as well as the approval of other IPTA. The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at other IPTA. No course equivalence condition is required.

(c)

Minor Courses (i) For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should adhere to either conditions (a) or (b), and take into account of the programme requirement.

23

(d) (e) (f)

The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third of the total number of units for the programme. Credit exemption from other IPTA can be considered only once for each IPTA. The examination results obtained by a student taken at other IPTA will be taken into account for graduation purpose. Grade obtained for each course will be combined with the grades obtained at USM for CGPA calculation. Students who have applied and approved for credit transfer are not allowed to cancel the approval after the examination result is obtained. Students are required to register courses at other IPTA with not less than the total minimum units as well as not exceeding the maximum units as stipulated in their programme of study. However, for specific cases (e.g. students on extended semester and only require a few units for graduation), the Dean may approve such students to register less than the minimum and the semester will not be counted in the residential requirement. In this case, the CGPA calculation will be carried out as in KSCP. USM students attending courses at other IPTA and if failed in any courses are allowed to resit the examination if there is such provision in that IPTA. If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other IPTA is not the same as in USM, a grade conversion method will be carried out according to the existing scales. USM students who have registered courses at other IPTA and decided to return to study in USM, must adhere to the existing course registration conditions in USM.

(g) (h)

(i) (j)

(k)

Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer USM students who would like to attend courses/credit transfer at other IPTAs should apply using 'Borang Pemindahan Kredit'. The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for the programme of study within three months before the application is submitted to other IPTA for consideration.

24

2.5 Academic Integrity "Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity is dangerous and weak" Samuel Johnson Being a student of the Universiti Sains Malaysia requires a firm adherence to the basic values, integrity, purpose and meaning of a university education. The most essential values in academia are rooted on the principles of truth seeking in knowledge and honesty with regards to the intellectual property of oneself and of others. Thus, students must bear the responsibility of maintaining these principles in all work done in their academic endeavour. Academic dishonesty violates the fundamental purpose of preserving and maintaining the integrity of university education and will not be tolerated. The following, although not exhaustive, are examples of practices or actions that are considered dishonest acts in academic pursuit.

25

(a)

Cheating Cheating is the unauthorised use of information or other aids in any academic exercise. There are numerous "infamous" ways and methods of cheating including: Copying from others during a test or an exam. Using unauthorised materials or devices (calculator, PDA, mobile phone, pager, etc.) during a test or an exam. Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam for you and viceversa. Sharing answers or programmes for an assignment or project. Tampering with marked/graded work after it has been returned, then resubmitting it for remarking/regrading. Allowing others to do the research, writing, programming, or other types of assignment. Submitting identical or similar work in more than one course without consulting or prior permission from the lecturers involved.

(b)

Plagiarism Plagiarism is "academic theft". It violates the intellectual property rights of the author. Simply put, it is the use, in part or whole, of other's words or ideas and claiming it as yours without proper attribution to the original author. It includes: Copying and pasting information, graphics or media from the Internet into your work without citing the source. Paraphrasing or summarising other's written or spoken words that are not common knowledge, without referencing the source. Not putting quote marks around parts of the source that you copy exactly. Using someone else's work or acquiring papers, assignment, project or research you did not do and turning it in as if you had done the work yourself. Giving incorrect information about the source of reference. Not acknowledging collaborators in an assignment, paper, project or research. Plagiarism is, however, often misunderstood. There are numerous sources in the Internet that describe plagiarism and explain acceptable ways for using borrowed words. Students should explore the relevant materials.

26

Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding prohibition against plagiarism (Part II, Provision 6):
6. (1) (2) A student shall not plagiarise any idea, writing, data or invention belonging to another person. For the purpose of this rule, plagiarism includes: (a) the act of taking an idea, writing, data or invention of another person and claiming that the idea, writing, data or invention is the result of one's own findings or creation; or an attempt to make out or the act of making out, in such a way, that one is the original source or the creator of an idea, writing, data or invention which has actually been taken from some other source.

(b)

(3)

Without prejudice to the generality of sub rule (2), a student plagiarises when he/she: (a) (b) publishes, with himself/herself as the author, an abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book which is wholly or partly written by some other person; incorporates himself/herself or allows himself/herself to be incorporated as a coauthor of an abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book, when he/she has not at all made any written contribution to the abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book; forces another person to include his/her name in the list of co-researchers for a particular research project or in the list of co-authors for a publication when he/she has not made any contribution which may qualify him/her as a coresearcher or co-author; extract academic data which are the result of research undertaken by some other person, such as laboratory findings or field work findings or data obtained through library research, whether published or unpublished, and incorporate those data as part of his/her academic research without giving due acknowledgement to the actual source; uses research data obtained through collaborative work with some other person, whether or not that other person is a staff member or a student of the University, as part of another distinct personal academic research of his/her, or for a publication In his/her own name as sole author, without obtaining the consent of his/her co-researchers prior to embarking on his/her personal research or prior to publishing the data; transcribes the ideas or creations of others kept in whatever form, whether written, printed or available in electronic form, or in slide form, or in whatever form of teaching or research apparatus, or in any other form, and claims whether directly or indirectly that he/she is the creator of that idea or creation; translates the writing or creation of another person from one language to another whether or not wholly or partly, and subsequently presents the translation in whatever form or manner as his/her own writing or creation; or extracts ideas from another person's writing or creation and makes certain modifications without due reference to the original source and rearranges them in such a way that it appears as if he/she is the creator of those ideas.

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

27

(c)

Fabrication Unauthorised invention, alteration, falsification or misleading use of data, information or citation in any academic work constitutes fabrication. Fabricated information neither represent the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a particular investigation or study thus violates the principle of truth seeking in knowledge. Some examples are: Making up or changing of data or result, or using someone else's result, in an experiment, assignment or research. Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to. Intentional listing of incorrect or fictitious references. Falsifying of academic records or documents to gain academic advantage. Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or other university document.

(d)

Collusion The School does not differentiate between those who commit an act of academic dishonesty with those who knowingly allow or help others in performing those acts. Some examples of collusion include: Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment, test/exam, project or research for you. Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project or research for something in return. Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others. Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing that such aids could be used in any dishonest act.

(e)

Unfair Advantage A student may obtain an unfair advantage over another, which is also a breach of academic integrity, in several ways including: Gaining access to, stealing, reproducing or circulating of test or exam material prior to its authorised time. Depriving others of the use of library material by stealing, defacing, destroying or hiding it. Intentionally interfering with other's effort to do their academic work. Altering or destroying work or computer files/programmes that belong to others or those that are meant for the whole class.

28

(f)

Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity Both students and academic staff must assume the responsibility of protecting and upholding the academic integrity of the university. In the event that a student encounters any incident that denotes academic dishonesty, the student is expected to report it to the relevant lecturer. The lecturer is then responsible to substantiate the violation and is encouraged to confront the perpetrator(s) to discuss the facts surrounding the allegation, and report the matter to the Deputy Deans or the Dean of the School. If the lecturer found that the student is guilty, an appropriate punitive grading may be applied, depending on the extent of the violation. Examples of punitive grading are giving lower grade or "F" on the assignment, test, project, or lower grade or "F" for the whole course. If the violation is deemed serious by the lecturer, the matter will be brought to the attention of the University Disciplinary Authority where appropriate action will be taken. If a student is caught in an examination, the University Examination Board will pursue the matter according to the university's procedure. The consequence then may range from a warning, fine not exceeding RM200, exclusion from any specific part or parts of the University for a specified period, suspension from being a student of the University for a specified period, or expulsion from the University (University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999).

Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding Conduct During Examination (Part II, Provision 8):
8. No student can(a) take any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials, other than those authorised by the examiner, into or out of any examination room, or receive any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials from outsiders when in examination room. Students can receive any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials recommended by the examiner or the Board of Examiners, and authorized by the Vice-Chancellor (b) write, or have somebody else to write, any information or to draw diagrams which can be related to the examination taken by the student, on any parts of the body, or on the clothings worn by the student. (c) contact with other students during an examination through any form of communication, or (d) cheat or try to cheat or act in any way that can be interpreted as cheating.

29

Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding Disciplinary Punishment (Part II, Provision 48):
48. A student who commits a disciplinary offense under these Rules and found guilty of the offense can be punished according to any one or any two or more of the following appropriate actions; warning; fine not more than two hundred ringgit; banned from entering any or certain premises of the University for a specified period; suspended from being a student of the University for a specified period; dismissed from the University

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

2.6 USM Mentor Programme Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves the staff undergoing special training as a consultant and guide to USM community who would like to share their feelings and any psychosocial aspects that could harm their social functions. This programme manages psychosocial issues in a more effective manner and finally could improve the well-being of individuals in order to achieve life of better quality. Objectives (a) (b) (c) (d) As a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing with stress, psychosocial problems and many more in order to reinforce the well-being of the USM community. To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes caring society for USM To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help To prevent damages in any psychosocial aspects before they reach a critical stage.

For more information, please visit www.usm.my/mentor 2.7 (a) Student Exchange Program Overseas Study Scheme (SBLN)

The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students to study one or two semesters abroad at any USM s associate institutions. Ideally, students are encouraged to participate in the exchange programme within their third to fifth semester (3-year degree programme) and within third to seventh semester (4-year degree programme).

30

Studies abroad are planned beforehand with the Dean or Deputy Dean of the respective School, and with the International Office. Credits earned at an associate university are transferable as a part of credit accumulation for graduation. (b) Student Exchange Programme between Higher Education Institutions (RPPIPT)

RPPIPT aim to give opportunity to USM students to pursue their studies for a semester or for one academic session in other IPTA in Malaysia. Through this programme, the students can transfer their credits for the courses taken at other IPTA. For more information, please visit http://www.usm.my/io

31

3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Summary of University Requirements Students are required to take 15 - 18 units of the following University/Option courses for University requirements:
University Requirements (i) Bahasa Malaysia (ii) English Language (iii) Local Students Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units) Ethnic Relations (2 Units) Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units) International Students Malaysian Studies (4 Units) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units) (iv) Third Language/Co-Curriculum /Skill Course/Options Students have to choose one of the followings: (A) Third Language Package (6 Units) (B) Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units) (C) Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (3 Units) Total No. of Units 2 4

3-6 15 - 18

* Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are exempted from following this course. The units should be replaced by an option course. Students from the School of Education are required to choose a uniformed body co-curriculum package from (B). Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one unit of co-curriculum course.

Details of the University requirements are given in the following sections. 3.2 Bahasa Malaysia (a) Local Students The requirements are as follows: LKM300/2 - Bahasa Malaysia III This course is for students who do not possess credit grades in the Bahasa Melayu subject at the SPM level. These students are required to take and pass with a minimum grade of C in LKM300 as prerequisite (type Z) and then pass with the minimum grade of C LKM400 - Bahasa Malaysia IV. LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV All Malaysian students must take and pass LKM400 with a minimum grade of C in order to graduate.

32

Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows:

No 1. 2. Qualification SPM/MCE/SC (or equivalent qualification) (a) LKM 300 (b) SPM/MCE/SAP (or equivalent qualification) (c) STPM/HSC (or equivalent qualification) Grade Pass A-C 1-6 LKM400 P/S U 2 Level of Entry LKM300 Type Z Units 2 Status Prerequisite Compulsory Graduation requirement

Note: To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum grade of C is required. Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation if they have different Bahasa Malaysia qualification from the above.

(b)

International Students International students pursuing Bachelors degrees in Science, Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL) and Housing, Building and Planning. All international students in this category are required to take the following courses: Code LKM100 Type U Units 2

International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelors degrees in Arts International students in this category are required to take and pass three Intensive Malay Language courses before they commence their Bachelors degree programmes. The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as follows: Code LKM300 LKM400 Type U Z Units 2 2

International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelors degree in Arts. The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as follows: Code LKM200 LKM300 LKM400 Type U U Z Units 2 2 2

Note: Students must pass with a minimum grade of C for type U courses and no minimum grade is required for type Z course (LKM400) for international students.

33

3.3 English Language All Bachelors degree students must take 4 units of English Language courses in fulfillment of the University requirement for graduation. (a) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses
No 1. English Language Qualification *MUET LSP401/402/403/404 Discretion of Dean *MUET LSP300 Discretion of Dean *MUET LMT100 Discretion of Dean *MUET Discretion of Dean Grade Band 6 A-C Level of Entry LHP 451/452/453/ 454/455/456/ 457/458/459 LSP 401/402/403/ 404 LSP300 Status Compulsory/ Option/Type U (2 Units) Compulsory/ Type U (2 Units) Compulsory/ Type U (2 Units) Pre-requisite/ Type Z (2 Units)

2.

Band 5 A-C Band 4 A-C Band 3/2/1 (Score 0 - 179)

3.

4.

LMT100/ Resit MUET

* MUET: Malaysian University English Test. Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation if they have different English Language qualification from the above. Note: Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for graduation. In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have to pass with a minimum grade of C. Students with a Score 260 - 300 (Band 6) in MUET must accumulate the 4 units of English from the courses in the post-advanced level (LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*). They can also take foreign language courses to replace their English language units but they must first obtain a written consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation. (Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation.) [*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 458 and 459 is 2.] Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to resit MUET to improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and pass with a minimum grade of C.

34

(b)

English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units) The English Language courses offered as University courses are as follows:
No 1. 2. 3. Code/Unit LMT100/2 LSP300/2 LSP401/2 Course Title Preparatory English Academic English General English School (If Applicable) Students from all Schools Students from all Schools School of Education Studies (Arts) School of Fine Arts School of Humanities School of Social Sciences School of Biological Sciences School of Physics School of Chemical Sciences School of Mathematical Sciences School of Industrial Technology School of Education Studies (Science) School of Medical Sciences School of Health & Dental Sciences School of Pharmaceutical Sciences School of Management School of Communication School of Computer Sciences School of Housing, Building and Planning Schools of Engineering

4.

LSP402/2

Scientific and Medical English

5.

LSP403/2

Business and Communication English Technical and Engineering English

6.

LSP404/2

3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisations/Ethnic Relations/ Core Entrepreneurship (a) Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): HTU 223 Islamic and Asian Civilisation (TITAS) (2 units) This course aims to increase students knowledge on history, principles, values, main aspect of Malay civilization, Islamic civilization and its culture. With the academic exposure to cultural issues and civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped that students will be more aware of issues that can contribute to the cultivation of the culture of respect and harmony among the plural society of Malaysia. Among the topics in this course are Interaction among Various Civilization, Islamic Civilization, Malay Civilization, Contemporary Challenges faced by the Islamic and Asian Civilization and Islamic Hadhari Principles.

35

(b) Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): SHE 101 Ethnic Relations (2 units) This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This course is designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students to the basic concept and the practices of social accord in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce basic understanding of challenges and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to provide an understanding and awareness in managing the complexity of ethnic relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is hoped that students will be able to identify and apply the skills to issues associated with ethnic relations in Malaysia. (c) Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): WUS 101 Core Entrepreneurship (2 units) This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field of entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the implementation of the learning aspects while experiencing the process of executing business projects in campus. The mode of teaching is through interactive lectures, practical, business plan proposal, execution of entrepreneurial projects and report presentations. Practical experiences through hands-on participation of students in business projects management will generate interest and provide a clearer picture of entrepreneurship world. The main learning outcome is the assimilation of culture and entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative is made to open the minds and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship among target groups that possess the potentials to become successful entrepreneurs. By exposing entrepreneurial knowledge to all students, it is hoped that it will accelerate the effort to increase the number of middle class entrepreneurs in the country.

36

3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option (a) Malaysian Studies The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C) for all international students: SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units) This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of government and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia. Emphasis will be given both to current issues in Malaysian politics and the historical and economic developments and trends of the country. The discussion begins with a review of the independence process. An analysis of the formation and workings of the major institutions of government parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy, and the electoral and party systems will follow this. The scope and extent of Malaysian democracy will be considered, especially in light of current changes and developments in Malaysian politics. The second part of the course focuses on specific issues: ethnic relations, national unity and the national ideology; development and political change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern world system; civil society; law, justice and order; and directions for the future. (b) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units) International students need to fulfill a further 2 units of option course or additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course.

37

3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options Students have to choose one of the followings (A/B/C): (A) Third Language Package (6 Units) Third Language Courses are offered as University courses. They are offered as a package of three (3) levels, 2 units per level. The total number of units per package is 6. Students are requested to complete all levels (3 semesters). The packages offered are as follows: Commn. Arabic LTA100/2 LTA200/2 LTA300/2 Commn. French LTP100/2 LTP200/2 LTP300/2 Commn. Chinese LTC100/2 LTC200/2 LTC300/2 Commn. Russian LTR100/2 LTR200/2 LTR300/2 Commn. Japanese LTJ100/2 LTJ200/2 LTJ300/2 Commn. Spanish LTE100/2 LTE200/2 LTE300/2 Commn. German LTG100/2 LTG200/2 LTG300/2 Commn. Tamil LTT100/2 LTT200/2 LTT300/2 Commn. Korean LTK100/2 LTK200/2 LTK300/2 Commn. Thai LTS100/2 LTS200/2 LTS300/2

38

(B)

Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units) Students who choose to take packaged co-curriculum courses are required to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for students from the School of Education to choose a uniformed body co-curriculum package from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak). The co-curriculum packages offered are as follows: Armed Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (6 Units) (3 years)
PALAPES Tentera Darat (Army) WTD102/2 WTD202/2 WTD302/2 PALAPES Tentera Laut (Navy) WTL102/2 WTL202/2 WTL302/2 PALAPES Tentera Udara (Air Force) WTU102/2 WTU202/2 WTU302/2 SUKSIS (Student Police Volunteer) WPD101/2 WPD201/2 WPD301/2 Seni Silat Cekak

WCC123/2 WCC223/2 WCC323/2

Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (4 Units) (2 Years) Kelana Siswa (Rover Training) WLK101/2 WLK201/2 Bulan Sabit Merah (Red Crescent) WBM101/2 WBM201/2 Ambulans St. John (St. John Ambulance) WJA101/2 WJA201/2

(C)

Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (3 Units) All students are encouraged to follow the co-curriculum courses and are given a maximum total of 3 units for Community Service, Culture and Sports Co-Curriculum Courses (Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one of the co-curriculum courses including those listed in (B) above while those from the School of Education must take one of the uniformed co-curriculum packages from (B) above (excluding Seni Silat Cekak)). Students who do not enroll for any co-curriculum courses or who enroll for only a portion of the 3 units need to replace these units with skill/option courses. The co-curriculum, skill and option courses offered are as follows:

39

(i)

Community Service, Culture and Sports Co-Curriculum Courses

Packaged (Students are required to complete all levels) Khidmat Masyarakat (Community Service) (2 Years) WKM101/1 WKM201/1 Jazz Band (3 Years) WCC108/1 WCC208/1 WCC308/1 Culture WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting) WCC105/1 - Gamelan WCC107/1 Gitar (Guitar) WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir) WCC110/1 - Kraftangan (Handcrafting) WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden (Modern Dance) WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional (Traditional Dance) WCC117/1 - Teater Moden (Modern Theatre) WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu (Malay Shadow Play) WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas (Basic Qigong Exercise) WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik Painting) WCC121/1 - Seni Khat (Calligraphic Art) WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak (Culinary Art) WCC124/1 - Kompang Berlagu (Melodious Kompang) WCC125/1 - Seni Wau Tradisional (Traditional Wau Art) WCC127/1 - Kesenian Muzik Nasyid (Nasheed Music Art) WCC128/1 - Seni Sulaman Benang dan Manik Labuci (Thread Knitting and Sequin Beads Art) WCC130/1 - Seni Fotografi SLR Digital (Digital SLR Photographic Art) Karate (3 Semesters) WSC108/1 WSC208/1 WSC308/1 Sports WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar (Volley Ball) WSC106/1 - Golf WSC110/1 - Memanah (Archery) WSC111/1 - Ping Pong (Table Tennis) WSC112/1 - Renang (Swimming) WSC113/1 - Senamrobik (Aerobic) WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash) WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis) WSC119/1 - Badminton WSC122/1 - Selaman SCUBA (SCUBA Diving) WSC123/1 - Kriket (Cricket) WSC124/1 - Sepak Takraw WSC125/1 - Futsal WSC126/1 - Bola Jaring (Netball) WSC127/1 - Pengurusan Acara (Event Management) Taekwondo (3 Semesters) WSC115/1 WSC215/1 WSC315/1

Non-Packaged (1 Semester)

(ii) (iii)

HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques) Other option/skill courses as recommended or required by the respective school (if any)

40

(iv)

English Language Courses The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfill the compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and Band 6 in MUET) or as skill/option courses: No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Code/Unit LHP451/2 LHP452/2 LHP453/2 LHP454/2 LHP455/2 LHP456/2 LHP457/4 LHP458/2 LHP459/2 Course Title Effective Reading Business Writing Creative Writing Academic Writing English Pronunciation Skills Spoken English Speech Writing and Public Speaking English for Translation (Offered only in Semester II) English for Interpretation (Offered only in Semester I)

(v)

Foreign Language Courses The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as option or compulsory courses to fulfill the number of units required for graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least two levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to register for another foreign language course. However, students are not required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign language course. The foreign language courses offered are as follows:
Arabic LAA100/2 LAA200/2 LAA300/2 LAA400/2 French LAP100/2 LAP200/2 LAP300/2 LAP400/2 Chinese LAC100/2 LAC200/2 LAC300/2 LAC400/2 Thai LAS100/2 LAS200/2 LAS300/2 LAS400/2 Japanese LAJ100/2 LAJ200/2 LAJ300/2 LAJ400/2 Tamil LAT100/2 LAT200/2 LAT300/2 German LAG100/2 LAG200/2 LAG300/2 LAG400/2 Korean LAK100/2 LAK200/2 LAK300/2 Spanish LAE100/2 LAE200/2 LAE300/2 LAE400/2 Russian LAR100/2

41

4.0

Foundation Courses Foundation courses are an introductory course or courses that provide the basic aspect in the programme of studies, and as such is a prerequisite and compulsory for all the students. The offering of these courses will provide the essential basic knowledge and skills for various health related disciplines and in strengthening the students understanding of sciences before introducing them to a more advance and challenging subjects which require profound understanding of the fundamentals. These foundation courses will be offered as the compulsory School of Heatlh Sciences courses to all students in the bachelor programme. The number of units taken by each student is 16 - 25 units as required by their respective programme. Below is the summary of the School of Health Sciences Foundation Courses: No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU102/4 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 Course Title Structure and Function of Human I Biochemistry and Basic Genetic Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Human II Psychology and Behavioural Science Health and Community Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology Course Offered Year Semester 1 I 1 I 1 I & II 1 II 1 I & II 2 I & II 3 I & II 3 3 I & II I & II

4.1

Core Courses These courses are the major component of the programme of studies and reflect the specialisation and expertise in the academic discipline and also in awarding of an academic degree. Please refer to the list of core courses of the respective programme.

4.2

Electives Courses The purpose of offering elective courses is to ensure that students are presented with knowledge which not only complement the core courses but also will enhance and broaden their foundation of knowledge. The school encourages students to freely select any of the courses offered. All students of the school of Health Sciences are required to register a total of 10-15 units of elective courses. Students from Dietetic programme however, are required to register 20 units of elective courses. The units from electives courses will contribute to the total number of units for graduation.

42

Students are reminded to ONLY select courses indicated by the school and to avoid selecting courses from own programme unless permitted. Students are strongly encouraged to select electives courses offered within their respective academic year level. They may choose courses from one level lower or higher than their academic year, though this practice should be guided closely by academic advisor. The Elective Courses offered by School of Health Sciences are as listed below.
Courses offered as Elective Courses

Course Code GEG103/3 GEG109/2 GEG204/3 GEG208/2

Semester 1 Title of Course Fitness and Health History of Health Sciences Gender Perspectives in Health Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations Stress Management Techniques Violence & Society Tropical Natural Resource Management Botany and Health Basic Immunology Molecular Biology Toxicology Basic Chemistry Principles of Health Management Arabic Language I Japanese Language I Arabic Language II Japanese Language II

Unit 3 2 3 2

Course Code GEG109/2 GEG114/2 GEG116/2 GEG117/2

Semester II Title of Course History of Health Sciences Oral Health Principle & Training of Aerobics Principle & Training of Football Womens Health Health Economics Gender Perspectives in Health Aquatic Ecosystems Stress Management Health and Personality Tissue Banking Communication & Self Development Forensic Sciences Principles of Forensic Dentistry Botany and Health Epidemiology Health Communication & Education Arabic Language I Japanese Language I Arabic Language II Japanese Language II

Unit 2 2 2 2

GEG213/3 GEG302/3 GEG308/2 GEG311/2 GTB203/1 GTB204/3 GTB404/3 GTF101/3 GTJ317/2 LAA100/2 LAJ100/2 LAA200/2 LAJ200/2

3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2

GEG201/2 GEG203/2 GEG204/3 GEG209/2 GEG213/3 GEG214/2 GEG303/2 GEG304/2 GEG305/2 GEG309/2 GEG311/2 GTB107/3 GTJ108/2 LAA100/2 LAJ100/2 LAA200/2 LAJ200/2

2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

* GEGxxx/x= Courses offered only as Elective Course and is subjected to changes.

43

4.3

PROGRAMME 4.3.1 Status of Students and Level of Study

Students are designated as equivalent to first, second, third or fourth year according to the total credit points accumulated as follows:Course of Study (Total Credit Unit Required for Graduation) Biomedicine (124 Units) Dietetics (122 Units) Nursing (132 Units) Medical Radiation (124 Units) Forensic Science (130 Units) Audiology (130 Units) Speech Pathology (134 Units) Exercise And Sport Sciences (126 Units) Nutrition (121 Units) Environmental and Occupational Health (125 Units) Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative Credit Acquired First Second Third Fourth

0 - 32 0 - 30 0 - 38 0 - 36 0 - 40 0 - 35 0 - 33 0 - 31

33 - 68 31 - 60 39 - 77 37 - 70 41 - 75 36 - 70 34 - 69 32 - 68

69 - 104 61 - 90 78 - 110 71 - 105 76 - 107 71 - 102 70 - 103 69 - 102

105 91 111 106 108 103 104 103

0 - 32 0 - 38

33 - 66 39 - 70

67 - 98 71 - 102

99 102

44

4.3.2

Biomedicine Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 124 units for graduation consisting of core (99 units), elective (10 units) and university (15 units) courses.

4.3.3

Nursing Programme The nursing programme was developed by taking into account the following criteria: (i) The requirement of the Malaysian Nursing Board is to have sufficient nursing skill training components for registration. The registered nurse does not need to adhere to this requirement. However, this component must be taken by students with matriculation, Sijil Tinggi Pelajaran Malaysia and other diploma qualifications.

(ii)

The nursing programme is structured as follows: Semester 1-6: The courses in Semester 1-6 must be taken by all students. Registered nurses can be awarded the Bachelor of Health Sciences (Nursing) upon completion of 115 units (core course-85 units; elective courses-15 units; university courses-15 units) in three years. Registered nurses may be given unit exemptions of not more than 1/3 of the total unit requirement for graduation. Semester 7-8: Students other than registered nurses are required to undergo nursing skill training components over a period of one year in order to fulfill the Malaysian Nursing Board registration. These students will then be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) upon completion of 132 units (4 years). 4.3.4 Forensic Science Programme This is a 4-year programme requiring a total of 130 units for graduation. This consists of core courses (107 units), elective courses (8 units) and university courses (15 units). 4.3.5 Dietetics Programme This is a 4-year programme requiring 122 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (91 units), elective courses (16 units) and university courses (15 units).

45

4.3.6

Medical Radiation Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 124 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (94 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units).

4.3.7

Audiology Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 130 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units).

4.3.8

Speech Pathology Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 134 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (104 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units).

4.3.9

Exercise and Sports Science Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 126 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (96 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units).

4.3.10

Nutrition Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 121 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (86 units), elective courses (20 units) and university courses (15 units).

4.3.11

Environmental and Occupational Health Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 125 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (10 units) and university courses (15 units).

46

Below is the synopsis of the structure of degree programme Programme Biomedicine Nursing Forensic Science Dietetics Medical Radiation Audiology Speech Pathology Exercise and Sports Science Nutrition Environmental and Occupational Health Unit Requirements for Graduation Core Elective University Total Courses Courses Courses 99 10 15 124 102 107 91 94 100 104 96 86 100 15 8 16 15 15 15 15 20 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 132 130 122 124 130 134 126 121 125

47

5.0

MAJOR PROGRAMMES 5.1 BIOMEDICINE

Introduction The Biomedicine programme offered by the School of Health Sciences, USM is a full time educational programme requiring 4 years or 8 semesters to complete. At the end of the programme, graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Sciences (Biomedicine). This programme was started in the 2000/2001 academic session with the initial intake of 30 students. The intake has been increased in a gradual manner and the total number of student depends on the availability of appropriate infrastructure and number of academic staff of the school. The Biomedicine programme is multidisciplinary in nature and it exposes students to the latest information and technology in the fields of Health Sciences. The nature of the programme is intended to cover all aspects of laboratory diagnosis, disease prevention and research in the fields of Biomedical Sciences including Pathology, Immunology, Haematology, Transfussion Science, Human Biochemistry, Clinical Biochemistry, Medical Microbiology and Parasitology, Pharmacology, Physiology, Anatomy and Genetics. In addition, courses in Psychology and Behavioral Sciences, Health and Society, Ethics and Law for Health Profesionals, Biostatistics and Research Methodology, Laboratory Animal Sciences, Epidemiology and Information Technology are also offered. Industrial training, Biomedical Practicum and Research Project will be introduced in the final stage of the studies to equip the students with the knowledge and skills in the diagnostic and clinical laboratory, disease prevention and research fields. Students are also required to take several Elective Courses and also the University Courses such as Malay Language, English Language, Advanced English, Islamic and Asian Civilization (TITAS). Students are further required to take skills development courses such as Thinking Techniques and English Language which is expected to equip the students with the necessary capabilities to face challenges that they may face in the working world. This programme was carefully designed to cater for the man-power requirements of both the private and public sectors of the Nation. The curriculum takes cognizance of the need to be proactive in its approach, whereby curricula of institutions from the US, Europe and Australia were used as a benchmark. This is to ensure that the curriculum is of quality and of high standards capable of producing graduates who are competent and are comparable to any in the world. Academic staff of the School together with others from the Medical and Dental Schools is responsible for the teaching of all courses and they are well trained and are experts in their respective fields. Students of the Biomedicine Program must complete 124 credit units as explained under course structure before they can graduate.

48

List of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTB106/3 GTB107/3 GTU103/3 GTB217/2 GTB204/3 GTB218/3 GTU302/3 GTB212/3 GTB221/3 GTB219/3 GTB222/4 GTB220/3 GTB310/3 GTB315/2 GTB307/3 GTB318/3 GTU303/2 GTB316/3 GTB317/3 GTB407/4 GTB408/9 GTB409/4 GTB404/3 GTB410/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 GTB224/2 Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioural Science Structure and Function of Humans II Human Biochemistry Laboratory Science Epidemiology Fundamentals of Health Informatics Immunology I Molecular Biology Techniques Immunology II Biostatistics Basic Microbiology Basic Haematology Pharmacology I Pathology Medical Bacteriology Clinical Biochemistry Medical Virology and Micology Medical Parasitology Pharmacology II Research Methodology Transfusion Science and Blood Banking Clinical and Laboratory Haematology Industrial Training Biomedical Practicum Research Project Toxicology Laboratory Management Health and Society Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Laboratory Animal Sciences Total Credit Unit of Core Courses Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 4 9 4 3 3 2 3 2 99

Programme Learning Outcome: At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge in biomedical sciences and display theoretical and practical skills in diagnosis and research. (C3, P4, A3)

49

PO2: Perform laboratory diagnostic tests based on standard protocols; manage diagnostic and/or research laboratories; perform research projects under supervision; and utilise up-to-date information and communication technologies. (P4; A4; CT1-2) PO3: Demonstrate and apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems and making decisions in diagnostic laboratories. (A3; CTPS1-3) PO4: Apply communication skills at working environment in a diagnostic laboratory, medical and research institutions. (P4, A4, CS1-CS4) PO5: Work in groups to solve health-related problems and participate as a team player in community healthcare and services. (A5; TS1-3) PO6: Demonstrate ethics and professional values in performing diagnosis and solving problems in laboratory investigations. (EM1-3) P07: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance laboratory services and research in biomedical sciences. (C3, P2, LL1-2) PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship skills in biomedical fields and relevant professions. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in activities related to teaching, service and research in biomedical sciences. (A3, LS1-3)

50

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme Code Unit Code GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTU105/3 3 3 3 3 12 Code Unit 2 2 3 3 GTU201/2 GTB217/2 GTB221/3 GTB204/3 Health and Society Immunology I Basic Haematology Molecular Biology Techniques Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTB107/3 GTB212/3 GTB219/3 GTB218/3 GTB224/2 10 Core Course Year 2 Semester II Epidemiology Basic Microbiology Pharmacology I Immunology II Laboratory Animal Sciences GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTB103/3 GTB106/3 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Fundamentals of Health Informatics Laboratory Science Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Human Biochemistry Psychology and Behavioural Science Unit 3 3 3 9 Unit 3 3 3 3 2 14

51

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme Code Unit Code GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTB310/3 GTB316/3 GTB315/2 GTB307/3 17 Code GTB404/3 GTB407/4 GTB409/4 Toxicology Industrial Training Research Project Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Unit 3 4 4 11 Code GTB408/9 GTB410/2 Core Course Year 4 Semester II Biomedical Practicum Laboratory Management 3 3 3 4 3 GTB220/3 GTB317/3 GTB318/3 GTB222/4 GTU301/3 Medical Bacteriology Clinical and Laboratory Haematology Pharmacology II Pathology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Core Course Year 3 Semester II Biostatistics Research Methodology Clinical Biochemistry Transfusion Science and Blood Banking Medical Virology and Micology Medical Parasitology Unit 3 2 3 3 2 3 16 Unit 9 2 11

52

5.2

DIETETICS

Introduction The Dietetics programme is a full time programme offered over 4 years or 8 semesters. Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Sciences (Dietetics). The programme will help to fullfil the manpower needs for Dieticians in Malaysia. Students will be exposed to all aspects of food care and nutritional requirements for patients especially those requiring special diets as well as knowledge of community nutritional requirements. The graduates are expected to be able to function as dietitians as well as consultants in related fields and in the field of nutrition as therapeutic food. Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTN101/3 GTN202/3 GTN207/3 GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN210/2 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/2 GTN301/3 GTN309/3 GTD311/3 GTN310/2 GTD308/3 GTD315/2 GTN311/3 GTD318/4 GTD310/4 GTD317/4 Title of Core Courses Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Health and Society Ethics and Law for the Healthcare Professional Biostatistics Food Science Principles of Food Preparation Principles of Nutrition Nutritional Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Nutrition for Health and Fitness Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetics and Communication Skills Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum Nutrition and Diseases Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutritional Toxicology Therapeutic Diet Preparation Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Food Service Management Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 4 4 4

53

No. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Code GTN401/3 GTD406/3 GTD407/3 GTD408/3 GTN407/3

Title of Core Courses Food Service and Industry Practicum Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar Total Unit

Unit 3 3 3 3 3 91

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply knowledge in nutrition and dietetics for problem identification, formulation and solution. (C3, CT5, P4) PO2: Apply in-depth dietetics knowledge to analyse, interpret, evaluate and improve nutritional status of patients in hospital and community in general. (C4, P5, CT12) PO3: Demonstrate critical thinking and scientific knowledge in dietetics. (C5, P5, CTPS1-4) PO4: Communicate effectively as an individual and in groups. (P4, A4, CS1-4) PO5: Demonstrate the ability to work as a team in healthcare settings. (A5; TS1-3) PO6: Demonstrate professional ethics and moral values in their profession. (P2, EM1-2) PO7: Undertake professional development and engage in life-long learning. (C3, P2, LL1-2) PO8: Integrate knowledge in nutrition and dietetics in entrepreneurship. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate the ability to be a leader among the healthcare professionals. (A4, LS1-3)

54

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme Code Core Course Year 1 Semester 1 Code GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTN207/3 GTU201/2 Code GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/2 GTU301/3 11 Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Food Science 3 3 3 9 Code Core Course Year 2 Semester 1 Nutritional Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Principles of Food Preparation Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3 3 3 2 Unit GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN202/3 GTN210/2 Unit GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTN101/3 Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Principles of Nutrition Health and Society Core Course Year 2 Semester II Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetics and Communication Skills Ethics and Law for the Healthcare Professional Unit 3 3 3 2 11 Unit 3 3 2 3 11

55

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme Code Core Course Year 3 Semester 1 GTN301/3 3 GTD318/4 GTN311/3 GTD315/2 GTD308/3 Unit Code Core Course Year 3 Semester II Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I Food Service Management Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Therapeutic Diet Preparation 4 3 2 3 12 Code Core Course Year 4 Semester II 4 3 4 3 14 GTD407/3 GTD408/3 GTN407/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar 3 3 3 9 Unit Unit

GTN309/3 GTD311/3 GTN310/2 GTU302/3 3 3 2 3 14 Code Core Course Year 4 Semester 1 GTD310/4 GTN401/3 GTD317/4 GTD406/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I Food Service and Industry Practicum Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II Unit

Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum Nutrition and Disease Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutritional Toxicology Biostatistics

56

5.3

NURSING

Introduction The Bachelor of Health Sciences (Nursing) is one of the programmes offered by the School of Health Sciences, USM. This is a 4-year (8-semester) programme. It consists of the following components: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) Biological Sciences Behavioural Sciences Nursing Sciences Clinical Skills Computer Skills Research and Scientific Writing Skills Communication and Information Distribution Skills Critical Thinking and Problem Solving Skills Co-Curricular Activities Social Skills Teaching and Patient Management Skills

These components are incorporated into the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic knowledge of nursing practise. In addition, it improves the nursing profession at par with other health care professionals. Scientific knowledge and evidenced-based care aid in promoting competent, independent and safe practitioners. The graduates of this programme are expected to be of calibre, innovative, proactive, with critical thinking and problem solving abilities. The university and elective courses enable the graduates to expand their mind set and horizon.

57

5.3.1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36.

List of Core Courses of the Nursing Programme

Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTB107/3 GTU103/3 GTJ101/4 GTU201/2 GTJ108/2 GTB203/1 GTB211/3 GTB214/3 GTB212/3 GTJ205/4 GTJ207/2 GTJ208/2 GTJ209/3 GTJ210/3 GTJ211/2 GTJ212/2 GTU303/2 GTJ309/2 GTJ310/2 GTJ311/2 GTJ312/6 GTJ313/2 GTJ314/2 GTJ315/2 GTJ316/2 GTJ317/2 GTJ405/5 GTJ406/4 GTJ407/4 GTJ408/4 GTU301/3 Title of Core Courses Unit Structure and Function of Human I 3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3 Structure and Function of Human II 3 Human Biochemistry 3 Epidemiology 3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3 Nursing Foundation I 4 Community and Health 2 Health Communication and Education 2 Basic Immunology 1 Biostatistics 3 Basic Pharmacology 3 Basic Microbiology 3 Nursing Foundation III 4 Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and 2 Renal/Urology) Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing 2 Nursing Foundation II 3 Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing 3 Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and 2 Respiratory) Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing 2 Research Methodology 2 Critical Care Nursing 2 Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and 2 Musculoskeletal) Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing 2 Research Project (one academic year) 6 Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, 2 Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) Nursing Education 2 Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, 2 Hematology and Oncology) Gerontology Nursing 2 Principles of Health Management 2 Medical Nursing Practicum 5 Surgical Nursing Practicum 4 Community and Critical Care Nursing Practicum 4 Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum 4 Ethics and Law for Health Professionals 3 Total Unit of Core Courses 102

58

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1- Acquire and apply the knowledge in nursing profession. (C1-C6, A1-5) PO2- Practices holistic, competent and safe nursing care. (P1-7, A1-5) PO3- Uses critical thinking and problem solving skills to make appropriate decision in nursing practice and management. (A3, CT1-4) PO4- Communicate effectively at every level of organisation and society. (A3, CS1CS3) PO5- Participate social responsibility as a team member of health care professionals. (A4, CS5, TS1-TS5) PO6- Apply learned nursing knowledge in a professional and ethical manner. (A5, P4, EM1-3) PO7- Apply lifelong learning in nursing profession. (P4, S3, LL1-3) PO8- Apply management principles and demonstrate effective leadership. (P4, S4, LS1-3) PO9- Apply scientific and analytical thinking in research and entrepreneurship. (C3, KK1)

59

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme Code Unit Code GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTU103/3 GTJ108/2 GTJ101/4 12 Code Unit 3 1 3 3 4 GTB107/3 GTB203/1 GTJ210/3 GTJ209/3 GTJ205/4 Epidemiology Basic Immunology Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing Nursing Foundation II Nursing Foundation III Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTB214/3 GTB212/3 GTU302/3 GTJ211/2 GTJ212/2 GTJ207/2 14 Core Course Year 2 Semester II 3 4 3 2 GTU101/3 GTU102/4 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 Structure and Function of Human I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioural Science Community and Health Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Human II Human Biochemistry Fundamentals of Health Informatics Health Communication and Education Nursing Foundation I Unit 3 3 3 2 4 15 Unit 3 3 3 2 2 2 15 Basic Pharmacology Basic Microbiology Biostatistics Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology)

60

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme Code Unit Code GTJ314/2 GTJ315/2 GTJ316/2 GTJ309/2 GTJ208/2 2 2 2 2 2 6 3 19 Unit Code GTJ407/4 GTJ408/4 GTU303/2 GTJ310/2 GTJ311/2 GTJ313/2 GTJ317/2 GTJ312/6* GTU301/3 Code GTJ405/5 GTJ406/4 *GTJ312/6 Unit 2 2 2 2 2 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Research Methodology Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) Principles of Health Management Research Project (one academic session course) Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Core Course Year 3 Semester II Nursing Education Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Hematology and Oncology) Gerontology Nursing Critical Care Nursing Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing

10 Unit 4
Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum

Core Course Year 4 Semester II Community and Critical Care Nursing Practicum 5 4 6

Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Medical Nursing Practicum Surgical Nursing Practicum Research Project (one academic session course)

8 15 *The research project (one academic session) will be offered in Year 3 (Semester 1) to registered nurses that have been given exemption from the practicum courses (the whole of Year 4). Matriculation and STPM students must take this course in Year 4 (Semester 1).

61

5.4 FORENSIC SCIENCE Introduction This programme is the first forensic science programme offered in Malaysia. It is a very popular programme and is highly demanded amongst prospective students. Students will be exposed to the latest knowledge and technologies in the field of Forensic Science via courses which have been developed meticulously. Renowned programmes from other countries such as the US, Europe and Australia were used as a benchmark. Teaching staff of the School together with others from the Medical and Dental Schools of USM, Chemistry Department of Malaysia, The Fire and Rescue Department, and The Royal Malaysian Police will together ensure that the programme is run smoothly and in an excellent manner. This programme is expected to help cater for the national requirements for Forensic scientists which are very much needed in the country. A total of 130 credit units is required for graduation as explained under the course structure section. List of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU104/3 GTF103/3 GTF104/3 GTF105/2 GTF106/3 GTF107/3 GTF108/2 GTB204/3 GTF200/3 GTF203/2 GTF204/3 GTF205/3 GTF206/3 GTF207/2 GTF208/2 GTF209/2 GTF210/3 GTF211/2 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTF300/2 GTF301/3 Title of Core Courses Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Structure and Function of Humans II Physical Chemistry Inorganic Chemistry General Chemistry Practical I Analytical Chemistry I Organic Chemistry I General Chemistry Practical II Molecular BiologyTechniques Criminalistic Criminology Psychology Forensic Analytical Chemistry II Organic Chemistry II Analytical Chemistry Practical Organic Chemistry Practical Chemistry of Pollutions and Environment Material Chemistry Natural Products Chemistry Biostatistic Research Methodology Biological Evidence Physical Evidence 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3

62

No. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.

Course Code GTF305/4 GTF306/3 GTF309/3 GTF311/3 GTF312/3 GTF313/3 GTF314/2 GTF400/3 GTF402/4 GTF406/6 GTF407/8 GTF408/2

Title of Core Courses Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drug Fire Investigation Forensic DNA Analysis Forensic Anthropology Organic Chemistry III Food Chemistry Forensic Serology Forensic Medicine Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives Research Project Forensic Practicum Examination of Questioned Documents Total Unit of Core Courses 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 6 8 2 107

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply the core knowledge of forensic sciences together with the other specialty areas of forensic sciences and display the ability to organize them specifically in the analysis of evidence in forensic investigations. (C3, P4, A5) PO2: Demonstrate technical skills required in the process of analysis, application and problem solving in forensic laboratory and/or at the real scene of crime. (P4, A3, CT1) PO3: Demonstrate the ability to use scientific critical thinking skills to obtain necessary information , investigate and conduct experiment or research in solving forensic related problems. (A3, P4, CT 1-3, LL1) PO4: Communicate clearly and manage the scene of crime, and identify other associated skills in determining the type of forensic investigations with ethics and professional manners. (A4, CS 1-5, EM2) PO5: Work in groups or peers in different stages of criminal investigations; searching for forensic evidences, forensic analysis, crime scene management, and reporting the findings. (A5, P4, TS 1-5) PO6: Display ethics and professional manners in the practice of forensic investigation and case presentation. (P2, EM1-3)

63

PO7: Identify and adapt with the most recent technologies and resources and opportunities for the advancement of forensic science services and lifelong education. (P1, C3, LL1-2) PO8: Apply good management skills and demonstrate entrepreneurship capaticities particularly in decisin making and planning. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate leadership skills through active involvement in social projects and the employment of fundamental knowledge in forensic sciences for the purpose of crime prevention. (A3, LS1-3)

64

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme Code Code GTU104/3 GTF106/3 GTF107/3 GTF108/2 GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTF103/3 GTF104/3 GTF105/2 3 3 3 3 2 14 Unit Code GTF200/3 GTF203/2 GTF209/2 GTF210/3 GTF211/2 16 Code Unit Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1I Structure and Function of Humans II Analytical Chemistry I Organic Chemistry I General Chemistry Practical I I Unit 3 3 3 2 11 Unit 3 2 2 and 3 2 12 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Physical Chemistry Inorganic Chemistry General Chemistry Practical I

GTB204/3 GTF204/3 GTF205/3 GTF206/3 GTF207/2 GTF208/2

Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Molecule Biology Techniques Psychology Forensic Analytical Chemistry II Organic Chemistry II Analytical Chemistry Practical Organic Chemistry Practical 3 3 3 3 2 2

Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1I Criminalistic Criminology Chemistry of Pollutions Environmen Material Chemistry Natural Products Chemistry

65

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme Code Unit 2 3 3 3 3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTF305/4 GTF314/2 GTF309/3 GTF311/3 Code 4 8 2 14 GTF403/3 GTF406/6 14 Code GTF402/4 GTF407/8 GTF408/2 Unit GTF300/2 GTF301/3 GTF306/3 GTF312/3 GTF313/3 Code Unit 3 2 4 2 3 3 17 Unit 3 6 9 Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1I Forensic Medicine Research Project Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Biological Evidence Physical Evidence Fire Investigation Organic Chemistry III Food Chemistry Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1I Biostatistic Research Metodology Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drug Forensic Serology Forensic DNA Analysis Forensic Anthropology

Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Balistic and Chemistry of Explosives Forensic Practicum Examination of Questioned Document

66

5.5

MEDICAL RADIATION

The Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation) is a 4-year (8 semesters) full time academic programme which has been offered since academic year 2001/2002 to students with qualification of A-level, STPM, matriculation, diploma in radiography or equivalent. The government of Malaysia has accredited this programme since 2004. This programme provides theoretical and practical training experiences, which will allow students to understand, able to explain and utilise ionising and non-ionising radiation in the diagnosis and treatment of patients. The offering of this programme is expected to assist in fulfilling the national requirements for trained personnel in the medical radiation science disciplines. This programme opens up career opportunities in the field of diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy and medical radiation protection which required knowledge and skills in these areas in order to ensure the safety of the graduates, medical and health professionals, patients and members of the general public. The students are required to complete a total of 124 units for the purpose of graduation. The whole programme consists of 94 units of core courses, 15 units of university courses and 15 units of elective courses. List of Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU106/3 GTX101/3 GTX102/3 GTX103/3 GTX210/3 GTX212/3 GTX213/3 GTX214/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTX302/2 GTX307/3 GTX314/2 GTX316/3 GTX317/3 Title of Core Courses in the Medical Radiation Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioral Sciences Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Medical Radiation Mathematics of Radiation Science Medical Radiation Physics I Medical Radiation Physics II Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology Radiation Protection and Safety I Radiation Protection and Safety II Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Nuclear Medicine Imaging Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3

67

No. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

Course Code GTX319/4 GTX320/3 GTX402/2 GTX405/2 GTX406/6 GTX407/3 GTX408/3 GTX410/4 GTX411/4 GTX412/3 GTX413/3

Title of Core Courses in the Medical Radiation Programme Imaging Techniques I Principles of Radiotherapy Brachytherapy Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I Research Project Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy Imaging Techniques II Radiotherapy Techniques Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques Professional Training Total Unit of Core Courses

Unit 4 3 2 2 6 3 3 4 4 3 3 94

Programme Learning Outcome At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply the knowledge of medical radiation sciences and display related skills in diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiation therapy and radiation protection in medical application. (C3, P4, A3) PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in medical imaging and radiotherapy procedures.(P2, P4,CT1) PO3: Apply scientific thinking in problem solving related to medical imaging and radiation therapy. (C3, P4, CT1-CT3) PO4: Apply communication skills in a hospital based working environment or research institutions.(P4, A4, CS1-CS4) PO5: Display good social ability and able to work as a team member r with other healthcare professionals. (A5, TS1-4) PO6: Demonstrate professionalism, good attitude and ethical values during patient management and clinical practices.(P2, EM1-2) PO7: Apply lifelong education and information management by having up-to-date ICT skills. (C3, P1, LL1-2) PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship in medical radiation profession. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient management and medically related professional activities. (A 3, LS1-3) 68

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme Code Unit Code 3 3 3 3 2 1 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTX102/3 GTX103/3 WSCxxx/1 WUS101/2 LSPxxx/2 15 Code Unit 3 2 2 2 1 6 16 GTX210/3 HTU223/2 LSPxxx/2 SHE101/2 WSCxxx/1 Gxxxxx/x Medical Radiation Physics II TITAS English Language Ethnic Relationship Co-Curriculum Choice from list of elective courses offered Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTX212/3 GTX213/3 GTX214/3 Gxxxxx/x Core Courses Year 2 Semester II Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology Choice from list of elective courses offered GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTX101/3 LKM400/2 WSCxxx/1 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioral Sciences Introduction to Medical Radiation Malay Language IV Co-Curriculum Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Core Courses Year 1 Semester II Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Mathematics of Radiation Science Medical Radiation Physics I Co-Curriculum Entrepreneurship English Language Unit 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 17 Unit 3 3 3 7

16

69

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme Code Unit Code GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTX307/3 GTX319/4 GTX320/3 3 2 2 3 3 2 15 Unit Code GTX406/6 GTX407/3 GTX408/3 GTX411/4 17 GTU301/3 GTX302/2 GTX314/2 GTX316/3 GTX317/3 Gxxxxx/x Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Radiation Protection and Safety I Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Nuclear Medicine Imaging Choice from list of elective course offered Core Courses Year 3 Semester II Unit 3 2 3 4 3 15 Core Courses Year 4 Semester II *Research Project Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy Radiotherapy Techniques Unit 3 3 3 4 13

Biostatistics Research Methodology Radiation Protection and Safety II Imaging Techniques I Principles of Radiotherapy

GTX402/2 GTX405/2 GTX406/6 GTX410/4 GTX412/3 GTX413/3 Brachytherapy Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I *Research Project Imaging Techniques II Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques Professional Training 2 2 3 4 3 3

70

5.6

AUDIOLOGY

Introduction This programme is designed to produce audiologists who are knowledgeable and able to practice in the field of audiology to fulfill the needs of public and private sectors. Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Sciences (Audiology). This 4-year (8 semesters) programme includes the theoretical and practical (clinical) learning experience through our Core University and Elective courses to equip the students to be competent as a practicing audiologist. Thus, students will acquire the necessary academic qualification to become a professional audiologist and play their role as part of the health care team. List of Core Courses of the Audiology Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTA101/2 GTA102/3 GTP101/2
GTU201/2

Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioral Science Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Physics for Audiologist Child Language Development Health and Society Bahasa Malaysia IV TITAS (Islamic and Asian Civilization) Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and SpeechLanguage Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Entrepreneurship Co-curriculum (Sports) Academic English Audiology Instrumentation Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustics and Phonetics Advanced Audiology Technique Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening Neurology for Hearing and Speech

Unit 3 3 2 3 2
2

LKM400/2 HTU223/2 GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTA103/2 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 GTP104/3 WUS101/2 WSCxxx/1 LSP300/2 GTA201/2 GTA202/3 GTP202/3 GTP204/2 GTP205/2 GTA203/3 GTA204/2 GTA205/2

2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2

71

No. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52.

Course Code GTJ317/2 SHE101/2 WCCxxx/1 LSP402/2 GTA206/2 GTA207/2 GTU302/3 GTB107/3
GTJ108/2

Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Principles of Health Management Ethnics Relation Co-curriculum (Cultural) Scientific and Medical English Otology Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System Biostatistics Epidemiology
Health Communication and Education

Unit 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3
2

WSCxxx/1 GTA301/3 GTA302/3 GTA303/3

GTU301/3 GTU303/2

Co-curriculum (Sports) Basic Hearing Amplification Technology Audiology Clinic I Paediatric Audiology
Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Research Methodology

1 3 3 3
3 2

GTA304/4 GTA305/3 GTA306/3 GTP305/2 GEG203/2 GTA401/6 GTA402/3 GTA403/5 GTP407/2 GTA404/2 GTA405/5 GEG304/2

Audiology Clinic II Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology Auditory Rehabilitation Counselling for Special Population Health Economy Research Project Noise and Hearing Audiology Clinic III Learning Disabilities Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Audiology Clinic IV Communication and Self Development Total Unit of Core Courses

4 3 3 2 2 6 3 5 2 2 5 2 130

72

Programme Learning Outcome: At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Demonstrate fundamental and advanced knowledge, (theoretically and clinicall) in the field of audiological sciences. (C4; P4; A3) PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills in diagnosis and re/habilitative audiology. (P2, P4, CT1) PO3: Display critical and scientific thinking in integrating the audiological knowledge in assessment, interpretation, management, and re/habilitation aspects of hearing, balance and related disorders. (C3, P4, CT1-3) PO4: Demonstrate communication skills in dealing with patients, family members and health-related professionals and other related working environments. (P4, A4, CS1-CS4) PO5: Participate effectively in multi-disciplinary teams in managing patients with hearing and balance disorders. (A4; S2; TS1-4) PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conducts and ethical standards and demonstrate sensitivity to the differences in culture 66and religion. (P2; A2; EM1-3) PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance clinical services and research in audiology. (C3, P1, LL1-2) PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills in audiology-related fields and practice systemic management in clinical audiology. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient management and health-related professions. (A3, LS1-3)

73

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme Code Code GTU101/3 3 3
2

Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Unit

Core Courses Year 1 Semester 2

Unit

GTU105/3
GTU201/2

GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTA103/2 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 GTP104/3 WUS101/2 WSCxxx/1 LSP300/2

3 3 2 2 2 3 2 1 2

GTA101/2 GTA102/3 GTP101/2 LKM400/2 HTU223/2 2 2 19 3 2

Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Health and Society Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Physics for Audiologist Child Language Development Bahasa Malaysia IV TITAS 2

Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamental of Health Informatics Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Entrepreneurship Co-Curriculum (Sports) Academic English

20

74

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme Code Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Unit Code GTA203/3 GTA204/2 2 3 3 2 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTA207/2 GTU302/3 GTB107/3
GTJ108/2

Core Courses Year 2 Semester 2

Unit 3 2

GTA201/2 GTA202/3 GTP202/3 GTP204/2

Advanced Audiology Technique Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System Biostatistics Epidemiology
Health Communication Education and

2 2 2 3 3 2

GTP205/2 GTJ317/2 SHE101/2 WCCxxx/1 LSP402/2 2 2 2 1 2 19

Audiology Instrumentation Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustics and Phonetics Principles of Health Management Ethnic Relation Co-curriculum (Cultural) Scientific and Medical English WSCxxx/1

Co-curriculum (Sports)

1 20

75

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme Code Code GTA304/4 GTA305/3 GTA306/3 GTP305/2 GEG203/2 GTA301/3 3 3 3
2 3

Unit

Unit 4 3 3 2 2 14

GTA302/3 GTA303/3
GTU303/2 GTU301/3 Research Methodology Ethics and Law for Health Professionals

Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology Audiology Clinic I Paediatric Audiology

Core Courses Year 3 Semester 2 Audiology Clinic II Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology Auditory Rehabilitation Counselling for Special Population Health Economy

14 Code GTA401/6 GTA402/3 GTA403/5 GTP407/2 6 3 5 2 16 Unit Code GTA404/2 GTA405/5 GEG304/2

Unit 2 5 2 9

Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Research Project Noise and Hearing Audiology Clinic III Learning Disabilities

Core Courses Year 4 Semester 2 Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Audiology Clinic IV Communication and Self Development

76

5.7 SPEECH PATHOLOGY Introduction Speech pathology is a health science profession that deals with the identification, assessment, diagnosis, intervention and management of communication disorders (disorders of language, speech sounds, fluency and voice) and swallowing problems. The professionals in this profession are known as Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) in the government sector or Speech Pathologist in the private sector. Speech Pathology Programme provides an academic program for students to obtain Bachelors of Health Sciences (Speech Pathology) as a qualification to work as the Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) or Speech Pathologist. The main aim of Speech Pathology Programme is to produce professionals who have the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Therefore, to achieve this main aim, the objectives of Speech Pathology Program are to: Offer an academic programme that can produce professional who are knowledgeable and skilful in speech pathology. Provide students with the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in preparation to work as competence professionals. Develop sense of professionalism to ensure ethical practices provided to the public. Give initial exposure to encourage involvement in research, parallel to advancement in speech pathology profession.

This is a 4-year professional programme that provides students with theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Students will undertake programme core courses that cover topics on communication sciences and disorders, medical and health sciences, linguistics, education, psychology and research, plus several elective and university courses. The students will also have to accumulate 400 clinical hours during clinical years i.e. from Year 2 to Year 4 and complete a research project during the final year. List of Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Course Code GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTP101/2 GTA101/2 GTU104/3 GTU103/3

Title of Core Courses Structure and Function of Human I Psychology and Behavioural Science Child Language Development Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Structure and Function of Human II Fundamentals of Health Informatics

Unit 3 3 2 2 3 3

77

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.

GTP102/2 GTP103/2 GTP104/3 GTA103/2 GTP201/2 GTP202/3 GTP203/2 GTP204/2 GTP205/2 GTA202/3 GTP206/1 GTP207/2 GTP208/3 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTU302/3 GTP301/2 GTP302/2 GTP303/2 GTP304/3 GTU303/2 GTP309/3 GTP305/2 GTP306/3 GTP307/3 GTP308/4 GTP310/2 GTP401/2 GTP402/6 GTP403/6 GTP404/2 GTP407/2 GTP406/6

Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and SpeechLanguage Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and Throat) Linguistics for Speech Pathology Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic I Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustic and Phonetics Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology Speech Pathology Clinic II Speech Disorders Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Biostatistics Psycholinguistics Language Disorders Neuropsychology Speech Pathology Clinic III Research Methodology Hearing Impairment Counselling for Special Population Voice and Resonance Disorders Acquired Communication Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic IV Speech Pathology Clinical Placement Augmentative and Alternative Communication Research Project Speech Pathology Clinic V Swallowing Problems Learning Disabilities Speech Pathology Clinic VI Total Unit of Core Courses

2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 4 2 2 6 6 2 2 6 104

78

Programme Learning Outcome At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Demonstrate theoretical and clinical knowledge related to speech sciences specifically the principles and methods of assessment, intervention and prevention of communication and swallowing disorders. (C4, P4, A3) PO2: Demonstrate appropriate technical and clinical skills in speech sciences during formulation and execution of the prevention, assessment and intervention process. (P4, CT1-3) PO3: Apply critical thinking in integrating the theoretical knowledge, analysing and interpreting assessment findings for prognosis and diagnosis, problem solving and decision making. (C3, P4, CT1-5) PO4: Demonstrate communication and interpersonal skills in dealing with patients, family members, other healthcare professionals and community. (CS1-5) PO5: Collaborate effectively with other team members of healthcare professionals in managing patients with communication and swallowing disorders. (S2, TS1-4) PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conduct and ethical standard and demonstrate sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion practices. (A2, P2, EM1-3) PO7: Apply current development in speech sciences, clinical skills and utilise ICT knowledge to enhance their profession and support lifelong learning. (C3, P4, LL1-2) PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills and practice systemic management in speech sciences. (A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate leadership and social skills. (A3, LS1-3)

79

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme Code Unit Code GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 GTP104/3 GTA103/2 10 3 3 2 2 GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTP101/2 GTA101/2 Structure and Function of Human I Psychology and Behavioural Science Child Language Development Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Core Course Year 2 Semester II Unit 3 3 2 2 3 2 15

Structure and Function of Human II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and Throat)

80

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme Code Unit Code GTP206/1 GTP207/2 GTP208/3 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTU302/3 2 3 2 2 2 3 14 GTP201/2 GTP202/3 GTP203/2 GTP204/2 GTP205/2 GTA202/3 Linguistics for Speech Pathology Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic I Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustic and Phonetics Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Core Course Year 2 Semester II Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology Speech Pathology Clinic II Speech Disorders Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Biostatistics Unit 1 2 3 2 2 3 13

81

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme Code Unit Code GTP305/2 GTP306/3 GTP307/3 GTP308/4 2 2 2 3 2 3 14 Unit 2 2 6 6 2 18 Code GTP407/2 GTP406/6 GTP301/2 GTP302/2 GTP303/2 GTP304/3 GTU303/2 GTP309/3 Code GTP310/2 GTP401/2 GTP402/6 GTP403/6 GTP404/2 Unit 2 3 3 4 12 Unit 2 6 Core Course Year 4 Semester II Learning Disabilities Speech Pathology Clinic VI Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Psycholinguistics Language Disorders Neuropsychology Speech Pathology Clinic III Research Methodology Hearing Impairment Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement Augmentative and Alternative Communication Research Project Speech Pathology Clinic V Swallowing Problems Core Course Year 3 Semester II Counselling for Special Population Voice and Resonance Disorders Acquired Communication Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic IV

82

5.8

EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE

Introduction The objective of this programme is to produce graduates who are academically sound and able to function as the experts in the field of Exercise and Sports Science relevant to the requirement of the public and private sectors of the industry. It also takes cognisance of helping to achieve the national aspiration of creating healthy citizens. Students undergoing this programme are expected to acquire a high level of academic competency and knowledge that is at par with graduates of similar institutions within and outside of the country. The uniqueness of this programme is that it allows the graduates to be flexible and capable of continued development in their specific career. This is based on the curriculum design which helps strengthen the knowledge of exercise and sports sciences while at the same time students will be exposed to the health and sporting events relevant to the field. List of Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU104/3 GTS101/2 GTS102/3 GTU103/3 GTU201/2 GTB217/2 GTS201/3 GTS202/2 GTS203/2 GTS204/2 GTS205/3 GTS206/3 GTS207/3 GTN207/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTS301/3 GTS302/2 GTS303/3 GTS304/3 Title of Core Courses Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioral Science Structure and Function of Humans II Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science Sociology and Philosophy of Sports Fundamentals of Health Informatics Health and Society Immunology I Exercise Physiology First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Kinanthropometry Tests and Measurements for Sports Science Sports Psychology Sports Training Methodology Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports Principles of Nutrition Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology Sports Nutrition Motor Learning Sports Injuries and Rehabilition Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3

83

No. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.

Course Code GTS305/2 GTS306/3 GTS307/3 GTS401/3 GTS402/6 GTS403/4 GTS404/2 GTS405/3 GTS406/3 GTS407/3

Title of Core Courses Applied Sports Physiology Coaching Science and Performance Analysis Lifespan, Growth and Development Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription Research Projects Industrial Training Lifetime Wellness and Leisure Activities Sports Management Adapted Physical Activity Therapeutic Exercises Total Unit of Core Courses

Unit 2 3 3 3 6 4 2 3 3 3 96

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Posess comprehensive knowledge with a strong foundation in exercise and sports physiology (C3, P4, A3). PO2: Proficient in identifying and applying the appropriate tests and technical analysis. (C4, P5, CT1-2) PO3: Demonstrate analytical thinking, application of knowledge and problem-solving in research laboratories and at the actual playing field. (C5, P4, CT1-4) PO4: Display professional communication skills for accurate information dissemination. (P4, A4, CS1-4) PO5: Provide professional services to aid optimum health and fitness for the community. (A5; TS1-4) PO6: Demonstrate responsibility, accountability and portray professional ethics and noble values. (P2, EM1-2) PO7: Apply continuous learning and exploration of new knowledge in line with the latest development. (C3, P2, LL1-2) PO8: Incorporate management and entrepreneurship skills that will branch out as other career option s related to the field. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Display leadership and team management skills in taking charge of group tasks and in community. (A4, LS1-3) 84

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme Code Unit Code GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTS102/3 GEGxxx/2 LSPxxx/2 WUS101/2 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 16 Unit 2 3 2 Code GTS204/2 GTS205/3 GTS206/3 GTS207/3 2 2 2 2 2 2 19 GTN207/3 GEGxxx/2 LSPxxx/2 GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU106/3 GTS101/2 LKM400/2 WSCxxx/1 GEGxxx/2 Code GTU201/2 GTS201/3 GTS202/2 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamentals of Health Informatics Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science Malay Language Co-Curriculum Choice from list of electives offered Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Sociology and Philosophy of Sports Choice from list of electives offered English Language Entrepreneurship Unit 3 3 3 2 2 2 15 Unit 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 18 Core Course Year 2 Semester II Tests and Measurements for Sports Science Sports Psychology Sports Training Methodology Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports Principles of Nutrition Choice from list of electives offered English Language

GTS203/2 GTB217/2 GEGxxx/2 HTU223/2 LSPxxx/2 SHE101/2

Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Health and Society Exercise Physiology First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Kinanthropometry Immunology I Choice from list of electives offered TITAS English Language Ethnic Relationship

85

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme Code Code GTS305/2 GTS306/3 GTS301/3 GTS302/2 GTS303/3 GTS304/3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 18 Code GTS401/3 GTS402/6 GTS403/4 GTS404/2 3 6 4 2 15 86 Unit Code GTS405/3 GTS406/3 GTS407/3 16 Unit 3 3 3 Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Sports Management Adapted Physical Activity Therapeutic Exercises GTS307/3 GTU302/3 GEGxxx/3 GTU303/2 GTU301/3 GEGxxx/2 GEGxxx/2 Unit Unit 2 3 3 3 3 2 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Sports Nutrition Motor Learning Sports Injuries and Rehabilition Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Choice from list of electives offered Choice from list of electives offered Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription Research Project Industrial Training Lifetime Wellness and Leisure Activities Core Courses Year 3 Semester II Applied Sports Physiology Coaching Science and Performance Analysis Lifespan, Growth and Development Biostatistics Choice from list of electives offered Research Methodology

5.9

NUTRITION

Introduction The nutrition programme offers a 4-year (8 semesters) full time course leading to a Bachelor Degree in Health Sciences (Nutrition). The offering of the programme is to cater for the needs for more nutritionists in Malaysia. The nutrition programme has the purpose in delivering knowledge in the basic human nutrition and focuses towards community nutrition in Malaysia. It provides an academic programme that is able to produce versatile graduates and in fulfilling the needs of the job market in the future. The programme applies multidisciplinary approaches, and is taught by experts from basic sciences, food science, and dietetic, medical, social science and community services. Students will be exposed to every aspect of food, dietary nutrient requirement, evaluation of nutritional status and issues of lifelong nutrition cycle. Students will also learn the problems of nutrition in a community and methods in overcoming these problems. The research component will also be taught and students are required to carry out a research project in the final year. Teaching is conducted via lectures, seminar, practical, self study and directed learning. List of Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme No. Course 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Code GTU101/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU103/3 GTU201/2 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTU301/3 GTB107/3 GTN101/3 GTN202/3 GTN207/3 GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN210/2 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTN301/3 Structure and Function of Humans I Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Fundamental of Health Informatics Health and Society Biostatistics Research Methodology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Epidemiology Food Science Principle of Food Preparation Principle of Nutrition Nutrition Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Nutrition for Health and Fitness Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3

87

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

GTN309/3 GTN310/2 GTN311/3 GTN312/3 GTN314/2 GTN401/3 GTN403/6 GTN405/3 GTN407/3 GTD211/3 GTD311/3 GTD315/2

Nutrition and Diseases Food and Nutrition Toxicology Food Service Management Food Microbiology Nutrition Anthropology Food Services and Industry Practicum Research Project in Nutrition Current Issues in Nutrition Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars Dietetic and Communication Skills Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Principles in Medical Nutrition Therapy II Total Unit for Core Courses

3 2 3 3 2 3 6 3 3 2 3 2 86

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills for problem identification and solution (C4, P4, A3) PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in patient care, patients and community services, and apply scientific knowledge in research (C3, P2, P4, CT1). PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems and making decisions related to nutrition field (A3; CTPS1-3) PO4: Apply communication skills at any working environment in nutrition laboratory, health and research institutions. (P4, A4, CS1-CS4) PO5: Work in groups as healthcare profesionals to solve nutrition- and health-related problems and participate as a team player in community healthcare and services. (A5; TS1-3) PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes and professional ethics in nutrition applications and services.(P2, EM1-2) PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and to identify resources to enhance services and research in nutritions. (C3, P2, LL1-2) PO8: Display management and entrepreneurship skills in nutrition-related fields and professions. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills as healthcare professionals in activities related to nutrition, healthcare and research. (A4, LS1-3)

88

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme

Code Unit Code

Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 3 3 3 2 11 Unit Code GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTN207/3 GTB107/3

Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Principles of Nutrition Epidemiology

Unit

GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTN101/3 GTU201/2 Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Science Food Science Health and Society

3 3 3 3 12 Core Course Year 2 Semester II Unit

Code

Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Nutrition Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Principles of Food Preparation Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3 3 3 2 11 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/3 GTU301/3

GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN202/3 GTN210/2

Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetic and Communication Skills Ethics and Law for Health Professionals

3 3 3 3 12

89

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme

Code Code

Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Unit 3 3 GTN312/3 GTN311/3 GTD315/2 GTN314/2 GTU303/2 3 3 2 14 Unit Code

Core Course Year 3 Semester II

Unit

GTU302/3 GTN301/3 GTN309/3 GTD311/3 GTN310/2

Biostatistics Training in Community Nutrition and Dietetic Nutrition and Diseases Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutrition Toxicology

Food Microbiology Food Service Management Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Nutrition Anthropology Research Methodology

3 3 2 2 2 12

Code

Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 3 6 9

Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Current Issues in Nutrition Nutrition and Dietetic Seminar

Unit

GTN401/3 GTN403/6 Training in Food Industries and Services Research Project in Nutrition

GTN405/3 GTN407/3

3 3

90

5.10

ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Introduction The Environmental and Occupational Health Programme is offered by the School of Health Sciences, University Science Malaysia to domestic and international students as a full time 4-year (8 semesters) undergraduate academic programme. The students will be awarded the Bachelor Degree of Health (Environmental and Occupational Health) upon successful completion of the programme. This programme emphasises knowledge in field of biomedical as a competitive advantage, which enables graduates to communicate effectively with medical professionals involved in treatment and rehabilitation of individuals suffering environmental and occupational related diseases. The programme was designed and developed with care to fulfill the specific needs of potential employers, regulators and modern society in general. The graduates will be trained on international quality management systems, including ISO9001, ISO14001, OSHAS18000, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722: 2003. Students will be exposed to knowledge in the field of quantitative chemistry with special attention on skills of handling analytical instruments in quantifying pollutants in outdoors and indoors samples, independently. Student will also gain real life experience through an 8-month Smart Partnership scheme established between the university, industries and government institutions.

91

List of Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Course Code GTK101/3 GTK102/3 GTK103/3 GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU106/3 GTB106/3 GTF101/3 GTK201/3 GTK202/3 GTK203/3 GTU201/2 GTB107/3 GTK301/4 GTK302/3 GTK303/3 GTK304/3 GTK305/3 GTK306/3 GTK307/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTK401/4 GTK402/3 GTK403/3 GTK404/8 GTK405/8 Title of Core Courses in the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health Environmental and Occupational Health from Ecological Perspectives Biodiversity Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioral Science Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Laboratory Science Basic Chemistry Occupational Health Pollution and Health Occupational Health Health and Society Epidemiology Environmental and Occupational Toxicology Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminated Materials Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases Environmental and Occupational Emergency Occupational Rehabilitation Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Biostatistic Research Methodology Environmental and Occupational Laws Environmental Management Safety and Occupational Health Management Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum Research Project Total Unit of Core Courses Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 4 3 3 8 8 100

92

Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills in all situations involving environmental and occupational hazards and safety. (C4, P4, and A3) PO2: Demonstrate technical skills and capable in creating perception in order to identify environmental and occupational healths problems. (C3, P2, CT1) PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking in acquiring Environmental and Occupational Health information and apply scientific knowledge in research towards effective services. (A3, CTPS1-3) PO4: Apply communication skills effectively at any working environment in all organizations, industrials and society. (P4, A4, CS1-4) PO5: Demonstrate social skills and participate as team player in order to catch the organization goal and able to solve EOHs problem as a group. (A5, TS1-3) PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes, and professional ethics in environmental and occupational safety, applications and services. (P2, EM1-2) PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and identify resources to enhance services and research in EOH. (C3, P2, LL1-2) PO8: Identify and manipulate entrepreneur resources and skills in EOH related-skills and professions to facilitate society group in need. (C3, A3, KK1) PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership as healthcare professionals in activities related to environmental, occupational, healthcare and research. (A4, LS1-3)

93

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Code Unit Code GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTK102/3 GTK103/3 3 3 3 3 3 15 Code Unit 2 3 3 8 GTU201/2 GTK201/3 GTK202/3 Health and Society Occupational Safety Pollution and Health Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTU302/3 GTK203/3 GTB107/3 Core Courses Year 2 Semester II Biostatistics Occupational Health Epidemiology GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTK101/3 GTB106/3 GTF101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health Laboratory Science Basic Chemistry Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Core Courses Year 1 Semester II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behaviourial Science Environmental and Occupational Health from Ecological Perspectives Biodiversity Unit 3 3 3 3 3 15 Unit 3 3 3 9

94

Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Code Code GTK304/3 GTK305/3 GTK306/3 GTK307/3 GTU303/2 GTK301/4 4 3 3 3 13 Unit 4 3 3 10 Code GTK404/8 GTK405/8 Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum Research Project GTK302/3 GTK303/3 GTU301/3 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Unit Core Courses Year 3 Semester II Unit 3 3 3 3 2 14 Unit 8 8 16

Environmental and Occupational Toxicology Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1

Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminated Materials Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases Environmental and Occupational Emergencies Occupational Rehabilitation Research Methodology

Code GTK401/4 GTK402/3 GTK403/3 Environmental and Occupational Laws Environmental Management Safety and Occupational Health Management

95

6. COURSES SYNOPSIS

96

6.1. Core Courses Level 100

97

GTA101/2-Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech This course introduces anatomy terminologies and correlation between structure and function of the human body. It emphasizes on organs related to hearing and speech, i.e. head, neck and thora and their interrelationships. Topics which will be discussed include introduction anatomical terminology, main systems of speech and hearing the skull, respiration system, larynx and phonetic mechanism. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Fawcett, D.W., Jensh, R.P., Bloom and Fawcett's Concise Histology, 2nd Ed., Oxford Universitiy Press, 2002. Anthony, J., Seikel, J., King, D.W., Drumright, D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech, Language and Hearing, 2nd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999. Zemlin, W.R., Speech and Hearing Science: Anatomy and Physiology, 4th Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2000.

GTA102/3-Physics for Audiologist This course discusses the basic acoustics, electricity and electronics, such as magnetism and electromagneticsm, electrostatics, battery and mobile energy sources, electric circuits, resistors, capacitors, semiconductors, amplifiers, oscillators, interference effects and electrical noises. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Boylestad, R.L. & Nashelsky, L., Introduction to Electricity, Electronics and Electromagnetics, 5th ed., London: Pearson Education, 2002. Patrick, D.R. & Fardo, S.W., Electricity and Electronics: A Survey, 5th ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J: Prentice Hall, 2001. Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.

GTA103/2-Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) This course discusses the anatomy and physiology related to detailed speech production mechanism. This includes the skeleton, face, structures in neck, muscles and ligaments that are involved in voice and speech production and swallowing. In addition, this course will also include the physiology of articulation and phonation, vestibular and auditory systems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Clark W. F. & Ohlemiller K., Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing for Audiologist, Singular Publishing Group, 2004. Culbertson W., Cotton S. & Tanner D., Anatomy and Physiology Study Guide for Speech & Hearing, Plural Publishing Inc., 2005.

98

3.

Atkinson M. & McHanwell S., Basic Medical Science for Speech, Hearing & Language Students, Whurr Publishers, 2004.

GTB105/3-Human Biochemistry This course discusses aspects of human biochemistry including protein, carbohydrate and lipid metabolism, enzymes, hormones and liver and renal functions. It also discusses acid and base balance as well as fluid and electrolytes balance. The roles of macro and micro minerals and theirs metabolism are also included in this course. The focus is towards the theory and methods used in measuring biochemical parameters in humans. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss. Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ : Prentice Hall. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life. Boston: McGraw-Hill. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (Eds.). (2000). Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication.

GTB106/3-Laboratory Science This course introduces students to basic laboratory techniques as well as concepts of laboratory management and maintenance. Topics include ethical and professional attitudes, safety and waste disposal procedures, storage and maintenance of chemicals and reagents, record keeping, types and usage of laboratory plastics and glassware, apparatus, sterilization and disinfectant, principles of quality control, management and receiving and managing patient specimens. Students will be trained in the usage of basic laboratory instruments and maintenance of laboratory equipments such as pipettes and micropipette, routine laboratory instruments and others. List of text/reference books: 1. Bishop M.L., Schoeff L.E. and Fody E.P., (2004). Clinical ChemistryPrinciples, Procedures & Correlations (5th. Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins. Burtis C.A., Ashwood E.R. and Bruns D.E., Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and Molecular Diagnostics (4th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2005. Kaplan L.A., Pesce A.J. and Kazmierczak, S. (2002). Clinical Chemistry: Theory, Analysis, Correlation (5th. Ed.). Delmar Learning. Ramnik Sood, Textbook of Medical Laboratory Technology (2006). India: Jaypee Brothers.

2. 3. 4.

99

GTB107/3Epidemiology This course provides an introduction to the principles and methods of epidemiology. Explanation on the causes of disease with special emphasis on environmental factors will be discussed, followed by the roles of epidemiology in disease prevention and health promotion. The course will enable students to utilise the most suitable epidemiological analysis for conducting health programs and identifications of requirements for health care, and encourages the development of health skills within the clinical epidemiological framework. In addition, environmental and occupational health will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. Last, R. (1996). Kesihatan Awam dan Ekologi Manusia (Terjemahan: Wan Abdul Manan, Rusli Nordin, Abdul Manaf Hamid & Noor Hidayah Ishak) Pulau Pinang: Penerbit USM. Timmreck, T.C. (2002). Introduction to Epidemiology (3rd ed.). MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, Inc. Wasserheil-Smoller, S. (2004). Biotatistics and Epidemiology: A Primer for Health Professionals (3rd ed.). New York : Springer Verlag.

2. 3.

GTF103/3-Physical Chemistry This course will expose students to properties of gas and liquid, matter state principles, gas kinetic theory, chemical kinetic and chemistry thermodynamic. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. P. Atkins and J. D. Paula, Physical Chemistry, 8th Ed, Oxford University Press, 2006. R. J. Silbey, R. A. Alberty and M. G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., John Wiley, 2004. D. B. Ball, Physical Chemistry, 1st Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2003. J. Laider, J. H. Meiser and B. C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., Houghton Mifflin Co., 2003. N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 5th Ed., McGraw Hill, 2002.

GTF104/3-Inorganic Chemistry This course will expose students to various topics on basic chemistry including stoichiometry, atomic structures, nuclear chemistry, periodic table, chemical bonding and properties of matters. List of text/reference books: 1. C. Hoasecroft and A. G. Shaspe, Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2004.

100

2. 3. 4.

G. L. Miessler and D. A. Tarr, Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2003. T. L. Brown, H. E. LeMay, B. E. Bursten and J. R. Burdge, Chemistry: The Central Science, 9th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2003. R. H. Petrucci, W. S. Harwood and F. G. Herring, General Chemistry: Principles and Modern Applications, 8th Ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2002.

GTF105/2-General Chemistry Practical I This course will expose students to basic knowledge on chemical laboratory technical skill including gravimetric analysis, volumetric, titration, solubility, separation of mixing components and water analysis. List of text/reference books: 1. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments Chemistry: The Central Science, 11th. Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2008.

GTF106/3-Analytical Chemistry I This course will expose students to basic analytical chemistry which include stoichiometric calculation, equilibrium concept, gravimetric analysis, acid-base titration, complexometric titration and electrochemical cell. Statistic methods for data critical evalution and analytical data are also included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. J. Holler and S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, 8th Edn., Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2004. G. D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2004. D. B. Harvey, Modern Analytical Chemistry, International Ed., Mc-Graw Hill, 2000.

GTF107/3-Organic Chemistry I This course will expose students to basic theory on chemical bonding and molecule structures. It provides an introduction on organic compounds including their structure and nomeculature of functional groups, intermolecule force, organic reactions and their mechanismes, stereochemistry of alkanes, cycloalkanes, alkenes, alkynes, halides and their reactions. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. J. E. McMurry,Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008. T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 9th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2008.

101

3. 4. 5.

P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007. J. Hornback, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2006. W. H. Brown, C. S. Foote and B. L. Iverson, Organic Chemistry, 4th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2005.

GTF108/2-General Chemistry Practical II This course will expose students to basic knowledge on chemical laboratory technical skill including determination of gas behaviour, gas constant, R, colorimetric, rate of chemical reactions, extraction and recrystillation, paper chromatography and analysis of aspirin. List of text/reference books: 1. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments Chemistry: The Central Science, 9th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2003.

GTJ101/4-Nursing Foundation 1 This course comprises of three components: (1) History and Nursing Development; (2) Practice and Nursing Focus; and (3) Health Assessment and Nursing Process. History and Nursing Development provides students with introduction to basic nursing, including the roles of the nurse, philosophy of the nursing practice and nursing education, nursing history, development of the nursing profession at the national and international level, Malaysian health care system, traditional health systems as well as legal and ethical issues in nursing practice. Practice and Nursing Focus introduces students to the theories and principles of nursing, basic theories and primary dynamic health concepts. These theories are foundations to the other courses in years 2, 3 and 4. These are practiced in the hospitals, community and home in a holistic manner. The focus is on problem solving within the nursing context. Health Assessment and Nursing Process focuses on the practical aspects of basic nursing such as nursing process, history taking, health assessment, objective construction and methods of health identification, evaluation as well as interpretation of signs and symptoms of diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bickley, L.S. & Hoekelman, R.A., Bates Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking, 9th. Ed., Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott, 2005. Fuller, J. et al., Health Assessment: A Nursing Approach, 3rd. Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott, 2000. Kozier, B., Erb, G., S. Blair K., Fundamentals of Nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice, 8th Ed., Addison Wesley, California, 2008.

102

GTJ108/2-Health Communication and Education This course is an introduction to the field of health communication. Students will be introduced to the concepts and resources concerned, in particular to the role of health communication in health promotion and education in the context of national health care system. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Butler, J. Thomas, Principles of Health Education and Health Promotion, 3rd. Ed., Wadsworth, 2001. Hornik, Robert C. (Ed.), Public Health Communication: Evidence for Behavior Change ; Lauren Earlbaum Associates, Publishers : London, 2002. Mckenzie, J.F, Smeltzer, J.L., Neiger, B.L., Planning, Implementing and Evaluating Health Promotion Programs. A Primer, 4th Ed., Benjamin Cummings Pub. Co., 2004.

GTK101/3-Introduction to Environmental & Occupational Health This is a course that enlightens the students in the area of environmental health, occupational health, environmental safety, and occupational safety. This course will discuss the importance of responsibility and civil liberties of an individual towards the environment. The implication and significant of nurturing environmental & occupational health will also be highlighted. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Annale Yassri, Tord Kjellstrom, Theo de Kok & Tee Guidotti, Basic Environmental Health, Oxford University Press; New York, 2001. Megan, Environment, Health and Sustainable, Open University Press; London, 2006. Harper, Charles, L., Environment and Society; Human Perspectives on Environmental Issues, Upper Saddle River; Pearson Prentice Hall, 2004.

GTK102/3-Environmental and Occupational Health: Ecological Perspectives The students will be exposed to basic ecological components (e.g., abiotic, biotic, physical, and social). The students are taught the compatibility between human health with those basic ecological components and be aware of how the latter affects human health. The impact of destabilise basic components with respect to human health will also be further discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Hilgenkamp, K., Environmental Health : Ecological Perspectives, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 381p. WA30.5.H644, 2006. Molles, M. C. Jr., Ecology, Concepts & Application, 2nd ed. McGraw Hill, 2002.

103

3.

Marten, G. G., Human Ecology: Basic Concepts for Sustainable Development, Earthscan Publications Limited, 2001.

GTK103/3-Biodiversity The course introduces student to major phyllums of organisms in earth. Emphasis is given to differentiate the organisms based on their distinct characteristics. The importance of interspecific interactions and its surroundings will be briefed. At end of this course, students will be able to identify various organism living in their neighbourhood. Thus students will be more conscius on activities that destroys earth biodiversity. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Sylvia S. Mader., Inquiry into Life, 10th ed. McGraw-Hill, 2003. Audesirk, T. and Audesirk, G., Biology: Life on Earth, 5th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.

GTN101/3-Food Science This course will introduce students to foods and the different kind of fundamental changes in food as a result of food processing. It will focus on the scientific aspects of food research. The basic knowledge of foods will be taught through theoretical and practical aspects of food science. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Amy Brown, Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation, 2nd Ed., Thomson Wardsworth Pub., 2004. Mehas KY, Rodgers SL, Food Science: Biochemistry of Food and Nutrition, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill Companies, 2002. Norman N. Potter, Joseph H. Hotchkiss, Food Science, 5th Ed., Aspen Publishers, Inc., 1998.

GTP101/2-Child Language Development This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures on language development. It focuses on the acquisition and development of language among normal children. The topics covered are theories of language acquisition and language development processes in terms of language components i.e. semantics, syntax, morphology, phonology and pragmatics. Relationship between language development and other relevant aspects such as social and cognitive development are also covered in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. Owens, R.E., Language Development: An Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2008.

104

2. 3.

McLaughlin, S., Introduction to Language Development, London: Singular Publishing Group, 2006. Hoff, E., Language Development, 3rd Ed., Stamford: Wadsworth Press, 2005.

GTP102/2-Basic Linguistics This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to linguistics. It focuses on the fundamental knowledge in linguistics such as phonetics, phonology, morphology, syntax, semantic and pragmatics. Applied linguistics such as sociolinguistics and dialectology will be also covered in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Tallerman, M., Understanding Syntax, 2nd Ed., London: Arnold, 2005. Nik Safiah, K., Farid, M. O. & Hashim, M., Tatabahasa Dewan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, 2003. Mukhlis, A. B., Pengantar Sintaksis dan Semantik Bahasa Melayu. Singapura: Pustaka Nasional Pte. Ltd., 2002.

GTP103/2-Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology This is an orientation course which provides initial exposure to the clinical aspects of audiology and speech pathology. It focuses on the common procedures and managements in audiology or speech therapy. The topics covered are scope of practice of the audiologists and the speech pathologist. Assessment and management procedures for audiology and speech pathology cases are highlighted. This course also emphasises the theoretical and application aspects of observation skills will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lubinski, R., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, 3rd Ed., Oxford: Singular Press, 2007. Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T., Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist and Audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and Disorders: From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2010.

GTP104/3-Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to the field of psychology. It focuses on the developmental psychology of the human from prenatal to late adulthood. The topics covered include theories in developmental psychology and human development in relation to biological, cognitive, personality and social asprects.

105

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bremner, G. & Slater, A., Introduction to Developmental Psychology, Oxford: Blackwell, 2003. Papalia, D. E. & Olds, S. W., Human Development, 8th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2008. Ulijaszek, S. J., Johnson, F. E. & Preece, M. A., The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Human Growth and Development , Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000.

GTS101/2-Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science The course introduces the student to the scietific discipline known as Exercise and Sports Science through the exposure to its history and consequently to the latest knowledge and current technology in the field. Students will be exposed to the basic and the subdisciplines of exercise and sports science. The course will also introduce students to the characteristics and career opportunities of this profession. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Brown, S. P., Introduction to Exercise Sciences, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000. Lumpkin, A., Introduction to Physical Education, Exercise Science and Sports Activities, McGrawHill Book Co., 2002. Senn, A., Power, Politics and the Olympic Games, Champaign, IL : Human Kinetics, 1999.

GTS102/3-Sociology and Philosophy of Sports This course provides the students with the basic concepts in sociology and the philosophy of sports. In addition, there will be discussions and considerations of the sociological and philosophical implications to previous and current development in the field of sports. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coakley, J., Sport in Society: Issues and Controversies, Columbus, OH: McGraw-Hill, 2001. Kretchmar, R. S., Practical Philosophy of Sport and Physical Activity, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Morgan, W. J., Ethics in Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007.

GTU101/3-Structure and Function of Humans I This course will discuss aspects of basic anatomy including the terminologies related to cell structures, primary tissues and human organ systems from the macro and micro perspectives. Emphasis will then be directed towards the anatomical and physiological aspects of the various human organ systems.

106

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company. Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology (3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology (12th Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheaters functional histology: A text and color atlas (5th Ed.).Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.

GTU103/3-Fundamentals of Health Informatics This fundamental health informatics course will introduce students to the concept and application of information and communication technology (ICT) in the field of health sciences. The topic of lectures comprise: Introduction to Computer Literacy, Information and Communication Technology in Health Organisation, Telehealth, ICT Security, Computer Ethics, Digital Authentication of Software and Application, Copyright, Copyleft and Open Source, Computer System, Peripheral and Accessories, Laboratory Equipment/Analyser Computer Interface, Network System and Data Communication Equipment, Operating System and Application Software, Database System and Multimedia System. To create better understanding of applied health informatics, students will have opportunities to use available information system applications related to their field of studies as well as Tele-health applications. ICT practical topics will cover: Introduction to Major Operating Systems such as Microsoft Windows and Macintosh, Computer & Computer Peripheral, Management & Security of Data and Information, Internet, Elearning System, Office Suite Application (Word Processor, Presentation and Spreadsheet), Graphic Editing Application and Database Management System Application. In searching information on the WWW more systematically and effectively, a demonstration using commonly used search engine via advanced mode will be given. Methods of accessing and searching articles in e-journals and database will also be taught. Students will be assigned a group project on multimedia development OR digital video clip editing and production OR web page development. Through this project, students will have the opportunities to implement an effective and interesting means of information delivery. Students will use software application such as Macromedia Flash for development of multimedia materials, iMovie for digital video editing and production works or Macromedia Dreamweaver for web page development. Course will be delivered in a lecture hall, computer laboratory and through an e-learning system.

107

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Abdullah Embong (2000). Sistem Pangkalan Data, Konsep Asas, Reka Bentuk dan Pelaksanaan. Malaysia: Tradisi Ilmu. Englebard & Nelson (2002). Health Care Informatics An Interdisciplinary Approach. Edinburgh: Mosby. Gary B. S, et al. (2005). Discovering Computers. A Gateway to Information, Complete, Shelly Cashman Series, Course Technology.

GTU104/3-Structure and Function of Humans II This course will concentrate on the various anatomical and physiological aspects of the respiratory, urinary, gastrointestinal, endocrine and reproductive systems as well as the skin. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company. Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology (3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology (12th Ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheaters functional histology: A text and color atlas (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.

GTU105/3-Psychology and Behavioural Science This course will provide students with basic theoretical knowledge and principles of psychology. Developmental psychology including psychology of infants, children and adolescents together with factors that influence them like familial and external factors will be covered. Principles of behavioural sciences with respect to personality, motivation, emotion, attitude, management of mental stress and counseling techniques will also be taught. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coon D. (2007). Intoduction to Psychology (10th Ed.). San Francisco: Wadsworth. Schwartz, B. and Robbins, S. J. (1996). Psychology of Learning & Behavior (4th Ed.). NW: W. W. Norton & Company. Wedding, D., Their, S.O. and Daschle T. (2001). Behaviour and Medicine (3rd Ed.). NY: Hogrefe & Huber Publishers.

108

GTU106/3-Biochemistry and Basic Genetics This course will discuss the structures and the functions of cellular organelles. The focus will be towards the characteristics and functions of biomolecules, which includes carbohydrates, nucleic acids, lipids, proteins and vitamins and also the characteristics and the role of enzymes in the regulation of metabolism. The second part of the course will introduce basic genetics, which includes the structure and functions of DNA and RNA as the genetic materials, transcription and translation, structure and chromosomal organisations, Mendels Law and other traits inheritance. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss. Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ : Prentice Hall. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life. Boston: McGraw-Hill. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (eds.). (2000). Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication. Zubay, G.L. (1998). Biochemistry (4th ed.). Dubuque: Wm. C. Brown Publishers.

GTX101/3-Introduction to Medical Radiation This course introduces students to the types of ionising and non-ionising radiations. The sources of radiation and the applications of radiation in medicine will be discussed. This includes the use of x-rays, gamma rays, ultrasound and laser in medicine. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee, WR and Ritenour ER, Medical Imaging Physics, 4th Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2002. Graham, DT., Principles of Radiological Physics, 4th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003. Henriksen, T. and Maillie, H.D., Radiation and Health, 1st Ed., Taylor & Francis, 2003.

GTX102/3-Mathematic of Radiation Science This course will discuss advanced mathematics and calculus. It will focus on function and graph, advance function and equality solution, advance geometry, matrix, vector, complex number, limit and the use of first principles in polynomial differentiation, differentiation, differentiation techniques and applications, integration, advance differentiation and integration.

109

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lay, D. C., Linear Algebra and Its Application, 3rd. Ed., Pearson Higher Education, 2002. Anton, H., Calculus, Combined, Student Resource, 6th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 1998. Larson, R., Calculus with Analytic Geometry, 7th Ed., Houghton Mifflin Company College Division, 2002.

GTX103/3-Medical Radiation Physics I This course will discuss basic physics in mechanics and relativity. The topics include kinematics and motion, forces, work and kinetic energy, potential energy and conservation of energy, impulse and linear momentum, rotation, static equilibrium and relativity. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley, 2007. http//hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu Giancoli, D. C., Physics: Principles with Applications, 6th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2004.

110

6.2. Core Courses Level 200

111

GTA201/2-Audiology Instrumentation This course discusses instrumentations used in audiology such as sound level meter, tympanometer and audiometer. Other topics are room acoustics for audiological tests, factors which affect sound level meter measurement and utility, types of microphone, audiometer block diagram, the function and standards of each component of calibrator (artificial mastoid) in audiometer calibration will also be discussed. Introduction to other audiological instrumentations are also discussed in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009. Martin, F. N., and Clark, J. G., Introduction to Audiology, 8th Ed., Reading: Allyn & Bacon, 2003.

GTA202/3-Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques This course provides knowledge about psychoacoustics that relates to hearing science. Basic theories of immitance audiometry, pure tone audiometry, and speech audiometry will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals. 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Hepfner, S. T., The Audiogram Workbook, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 1998. Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.

GTA203/3-Advanced Audiology Technique This course discusses detailed audiological tests in diagnosing organic and non-organic hearing impairment and balance disorders. The related issues in audiological tests and reports writing of hearing tests results will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., & Hosfod-Dunn, H., Audiology. Diagnosis, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 2007. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009.

112

GTA204/2-Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening This course exposes students to case management in audiology clinic via observation and lectures related to basic clinical management such as, report-writing, code of ethics, and their responsibility. It also discusses the concepts of hearing screening, its principal, objectives and methods of screening tests of all stages of life, including the needs of conducting hearing screening test at industrial sector. The sensitivity and specificity, advantages and disadvantages of each test, factors affecting test, and the differences between screening and diagnostic test are also discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Roush, J. (ed.), Screening for Hearing Loss and Otitis Media in Children, 1st ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001. Spivak, L. G., Universal Newborn Hearing Screening, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 1998.

GTA205/2-Neurology for Hearing and Speech This course introduces basic neurology related to hearing, balance, speech and language. The topics will be discussed include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech and language. It also discusses the neurological diseases related to hearing, balance, speech and language aspects. The topics will be discussed include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech and language. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Berlin, C. I. (ed.), Neurotransmission and Hearing Loss: Basic Science, Diagnosis, and Management, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1997. Love, J. R., and Webb, W. G., Neurology for the Speech Pathologist, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001. Musiek, F. E., Baran, J. A., and Pinheiro, M. L., Neuroaudiology: Case Studies, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1994.

GTA206/2-Otology This course includes the pathological processes, clinical symptoms, diagnostic algorithm and protocol, and of management otological disorders. This course also discusses clinical otology, hearing assessment, outer, middle, and inner ear pathologies, tinnitus, vertigo, sudden hearing loss, presbycusis and congenital deafness. Students will be given the opportunity to practice otoscopy, voice test, tuning fork test and exposure to patients at Otolarinolaringology (ORL) clinic.

113

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Browning, G. G., Clinical Otology and Audiology, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Butterworth Heinemann, 1998. Berlin, C. I., and Keats, B. J. B., Genetics and Hearing Loss, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Rockeinstein, M. J., Comprehenssive Review of Otolaryngology, Philadephia: Elsevier, Inc., 2004.

GTA207/2-Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System This course discusses electrophysiological tests for auditory system. A variety of electrophysiological tests will be introduced including both theory and practical. Students are also exposed to knowledge about factors affecting accuracy of the test results. The relationship between the test results and ear pathology will also been discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hall, J. W., Handbook of Otoacoustic Emissions, 1st Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses, Boston, Mass: Pearson, 2007. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009.

GTB204/3-Molecular Biology Techniques This course will introduce the students to basic techniques, principles as well as the application of molecular biology technologies in research and medicine. Topics that are covered include chromosomal structure, gene expression and regulation, extraction and purification of nucleic acids, DNA and protein analysis, restriction endonucelease and other enzymes in molecular biology, gene cloning and libraries, the concept of Southern, Northern and Western blotting, bacterial transformation and amplification methods such as PCR, LCR, SDA etc. The other advanced components of this course will also discuss the emerging research fields of Regulatory RNAs, Genomic Imprinting, Systems Biology and give particular focus on RNAi, microRNAs, the opportunities offered by the new generation of genome technologies and the elucidation of gene regulatory networks. Basic laboratory training in extraction of nucleic acids and protein expression will be given. Students will also be exposed to latest molecular biology techniques such as PCR, rt-PCR, quantitative-PCR, EMSA and Microarray. All students will be trained to use various bioinformatics software applications related to Genomics & Proteomics such as BioEdit, DNAsis, OLIGO etc. via a compulsary `Cloning Simulation Project exercise. List of text/reference books: 1. Dale, J. W. & Park, S. F. (2004). Molecular Genetics of Bacteria (4th Ed.). West Sussex: John Wiley and Sons.

114

2. 3. 4. 5.

Primrose, S. B. & Twyman, R. M. (2006). Principles of Gene Manipulation and genomics (7th Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications. Ream, W. & Field K. G. (2008). Molecular Biology Techniques: An Intensive Laboratory Course. Vikas. E-Book. Sambrook, J. & Russell, D. (2001). Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (3rd Ed.). USA: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. Watson, J. D. & Bell, S. P. (2008). Molecular Biology of the Gene (6th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings.

GTB212/3-Basic Microbiology This course will introduce basic principles in microbiology, which covers bacteria, viruses, fungi and parasites. Topics which will be discussed, include microbial diversity, genetics, physiology, biochemistry and metabolism, reproduction and control of microorganisms, microbial interactions, medically important organisms in human diseases, nosocomial infection, and antimicrobial therapy and resistant. Basic practical skills such as staining methods, culture techniques, microscopy and others will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Black, J.G. (2005). Microbiology: Principles and Explorations (6th Ed.). New York: John Wiley & sons, Inc. Talaro, K.P. (2008). Foundations in Microbiology. (6th Ed.). New York: McGrawHill Companies. Tortora, G.J., Case. C, C.L, and Funke, B.R. (2003).Microbiology: An Introduction (8th Ed.). Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Willey, J.M., Sherwood, L.M, and Woolverton, C.J. (2008). Prescott, Harley, and Kleins Microbiology (7th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Companies.

GTB217/2-Imunology I This course describes the basic concepts in immunology which include the concept of immunity and the immune response. Description of the types of lymphoid tissues and cells, the characteristics, types and functions of various molecules such as immunoglobulins, cytokines and the various components of the complement system as well as immune cells such as B and T lymphocytes will also be addressed. In addition, the concepts of antigen, immunogen, antigenicity and immunogenicity, as well as the importance of vaccination (immunization) and the basic concept of immunopathology will be described. The use of antigen-antibody interactions in diagnosis will be introduced.

115

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Clancy, J. (2006). Basic Concepts in Immunology. Boston: McGraw Hill. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001). Immunobiology: The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th ed.). New York: Garland Publishing Co. Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th Ed.) Boston: McGraw Hill. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.). Edinburgh:Mosby Sompayrac, L. (2008). How the Immune System Works (3rd Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Sciences. Inc. Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar, Thomson Learning.

3. 4. 5. 6.

GTB218/3-Immunology II This course describes advanced concepts in immunology particularly from the molecular immunological point of view. The involvement of immunological mechanisms in various diseases such as autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency, HIV infection, transplantation and tumour immunology will be discussed. The students will also be exposed to the priciples and immunological methods such as immunoprecipitation and agglutination reactions, ELISA, immunofluorescence, immunoenzymatic staining and flow cytometry as well as the production and use of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. Students will undergo a short placement in the Immunology Laboratory (School of Medical Sciences) to expose them to the actual situation in a diagnostic immunology laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. and Pober, J.S. (2003). Cellular and Molecular Immunology (5th Ed.). Philadelphi: W.B. Saunders, Co. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001). Immunobiology:The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th Ed.). New York: Garland Publishing Co. Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.). Edinburgh: Mosby. Parslow, T.C., Stites, D.P., Terr, A.L., and Inbode, J.B. (2001). Medical Immunology (10th Ed.). New York: Lange Medical Books. Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar, Thomson Learning.

3. 4. 5. 6.

116

GTB219/3-Pharmacology I This course exposes students to the basic principles of Pharmacology including pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and relationships between chemical structure and activity of drugs. Aspects of cellular pharmacology and biochemical pharmacology are also included. Some areas of systemic pharmacology (autonomic, cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine, antimicrobials, central nervous system, anticoagulants and antiinflamation) will also be addressed. Methods of assessing effects of drugs and measurements of blood levels using the latest techniques of chemical analysis will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co. Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd.

GTB220/3-Medical Bacteriology This course will provide the student with knowledge on general characteristics of medically important bacteria, the role of organisms in disease and health, the source, reservoirs and transmission of bacterial diseases and its pathogenesis. This course will also provide the students with skills in handling and processing of clinical specimens and various techniques in the identification of pathogenic bacteria (staining, culture, serology, molecular) and the advantages and limitations of these techniques. Knowledge and techniques related to laboratory procedures - antibiotic sensitivity test, serological tests, rapid diagnosis and tests for bacterial infections will also be taught. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scotts Diagnostic Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 2 (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick & Adelbergs Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill. Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennetts Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby.

5.

117

GTB221/3-Basic Haematology This course will introduce the students to the theoretical and practical concepts of basic hematology which include structure and function of blood cells and blood components, hematopoiesis, ferrous metabolism, vitamin B12 and folate metabolism, red cell metabolism and hemostasis. Particular emphasis will be given to a few important basic concepts such as haemoglobin synthesis, structure and function of blood cells, introduction to anemia. The students will also be exposed to basic hematological tests, laboratory management and intrumentations used in the hematology laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasi, (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co. Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science. Rodak B.F., Fritsma G.A. and Doig K. (2007). Hematology: Clinical Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science.

GTB222/4-Pathology This course will introduce the student to basic pathological processes including tissue damaging agents, cell injury, adaptations, inflammation, wound healing, haemodynamic disturbances and neoplasm. Pathological investigative procedures such as preparation and fixation of tissues, processing of tissues, slicing of the processed tissues with microtome and staining techniques including routine, special and immunostains will be covered. They will also gain basic knowledge on cytological and museum techniques. Students will also be exposed to actual working environment through practical classes in Biomedicine laboratory of School of Health sciences and short attachments at the Pathology Laboratory of the School of Medical Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Abbas, K., Aster, F., Robbins and Cotran Pathologic (2010). Basis of Disease (8th Ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders, Elsevier. Bancroft J.D. and Gamble M. (2002). Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Cheesbrough, M. (1987) , Medical Laboratory Manual for Tropical Countries (2nd Ed.), MA: ELBS and Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd. Culling, C.F.A., R.T.Allison. and W.T. Barr. (1985). Cellular Pathology Technique (4th Ed.). MA: Butterworths & Co.Ltd. Damjanov, I. (2000). Pathology for Health-Related Professions (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier - Health Sciences Division. Manual of Histological and Histochemical Methods, Dept of Pathology, PPSP, USM.

118

7.

Young, B., Lowe, J.S., Stevens, A. and Heath, J.W. Wheaters Functional Histolog: A Text and Colour Atlas (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier 2006.

GTB224/2-Laboratory Animal Sciences The course provides opportunity for students to learn the basic knowledge of anatomy and physiology, care, safety and management of laboratory animals. Students will also be introduced to rules and ethical issues involving laboratory animal in research and teaching. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. The UFAW Handbook on the care and Management of Laboratory Animals, Volume 1&2 (7th Ed.) Oxford: Blackwell Sciences Ltd , 1999. Hillyer E.V. and Quesenberry K.E., Ferrets (1997). Rabbits and Rodents Clinical Medicine and Surgery, W.B. Saunders Company. Fox J.G., Cohen B.J. and Loew F.M. (1984). Laboratory Animal Medicine, American Collage of Laboratory Animal Medicine Series. Smith J.B. and Mangkoewidjojo S. (1987). The Care, Breeding and Management of Experimental Animals for Research in the Tropics, International Development Program of Australian Universities and Colleges Limited Incorporated in the A.C.T.

GTD211/2-Dietetics and Communication Skills This course will focus on the theoretical and practical aspects of dietetics and communication skills. This course will also enhance individual skills in communicating with individual clients and a group of clients both verbally and in written form, establishing rapport with the health care team, obtaining and evaluating food records, planning menus, using relevant equations for the determining of calories, documention of nutritional care process using the SOAP format and other educational tools. This course also exposes students to many activities such as development of educational tools, conducting mock diet interviews, case presentations, case discussions and case report writing. The students will also attend various tutorial sessions emphasing on the aspects of nutritional education and cultural factors which influences the patients diet. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bauer, K.D and Sokolik, C.A., Basic Nutrtition Counseling Skills Development, America Wadsworth Group, 2002. Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. Bier, D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 4th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2001 Owen, A.L.Y. Splett, P.I and Owen, G.E., Nutrition in the Community: The Art and Science of Delivering Services, 4th Ed., Mosby Inc 1998.

119

GTF200/3-Criminalistics This course introduces basic principles of forensic science, concepts, philosophy and investigation techniques, as well as crime scene management. This course provides fundamental knowledge on fingerprints and the various chemical methods used to detect them. The course also focuses on various commonly encountered clue materials such as shoeprint and tyre marks, tool-mark, glass, paint, fibre, ballistics, blood, semen, document etc. and the physico chemical techniques available to detect them; It also provides fundamental knowledge on photography and chemistry of film and film development in crime scene documentation. It will focus on health and safety at crime scenes and the importance of the chain of evidence. The teaching will include investigations on the relation between the evidence and crime and investigation techniques used for collecting, labeling, maintenance and storage of evidence. This course will also expose the students to the criminal intelligence databases such as AFIS, IBIS, DNA, and SICAR. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Eckert, Introduction to Forensic Sciences, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida, USA, 1997. Saferstein, R., Criminalistics: An Introduction to Forensic Science, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2000. Nagaire E. Gange, The Forensic Casebook: The Science of Crime Investigation, Ballantine Books, 2002.

GTF203/2-Criminology This course introduces the students to the basic concepts, theory, and methodology of research in criminology. It will expose students to the philosophies, theories and main approaches in police methodologies, court procedures, corrections, rehabilitation, probation, parole, and victimology. The students are encouraged to use the theory, methods, and basic concepts of criminology to enhance the understanding, explanation and solve problems of social crimes in Malaysia. Students are taught to read widely, especially the reference books listed. They are also taught to write reports and to discuss certain reading materials and notes. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bernard T.J, Vold G.B., Snipes J.B., The Critical Criminology, 5th Ed., Oxford University Press, 2001. Schmallenger F., Criminology Today: An Integration Introduction, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2001. Goldstein, The Sexual Exploitation of Children: A Practical Guide to Assessment, Investigation, Intervention, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida, USA, 1998.

120

GTF204/4-Psychology Forensic This course introduces the students to the psychological aspects of crimes. Criminals, victims and other psychological disorders that are related to the crime scene will be discussed.. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Wrightsman L.S, Linsenman M, Taflinger M, Forensic Psychology, 1st Ed., Wadsworth Publishing, 2000. Baldwin, J.D. and Baldwin, J.I., Behaviour Principles in Everyday Life, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 1997. Turvey B., Criminal Profiling An Introduction to Behavioral Evidence Analysis, Academic Press, London, 2002.

GTF205/3-Analytical Chemistry II This course will expose students to analytical chemistry knowledge that has not been covered in Analytical Chemistry I which include spectrochemistry topics such as introduction to spectrochemistry methods, instrumentation of optical spectrometry, molecular absorption spectrometry, molecular flouresence spectroscopy and atomic spectroscopy. The students are also introduced to absorbtion methods which include an introduction of solvent extraction, gas chromatography and high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). Under electrochemistry methods, students are exposed to potentiometry and voltammetry. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Niessen, W. M. Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed., Boca Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006. Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd Ed., West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007. Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed. Weinheim: Wiley-VCH (1999). Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel Dekker, 2004. Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography 4th ed. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley-Interscience, 2004. Lough, W. J. and Wainer, I. W. High Performance Liquid Chromatography: Fundamental, Principles and Practice, London: Blackie Academic & Professional, 1996. Smyth, M. R. Analytical Voltammetry. John Wiley, 2007. Gosser, D. K. Cyclic Voltammetry Simulation and Analysis of Reaction Mechanisms Weinheim: VCH, 1993.

7. 8.

121

GTF206/3-Organic Chemistry II This course will expose students to chemistry of alcohol and ether, functional groups, aromatic compounds and their reactions also spectroscopic techniques to identify their chemical structures. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bruice, P. Y., Organic Chemistry, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2004. Solomons, T. W. and Fryhle, C. B., Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Wiley & Sons, 2000. Wade Jr, L. G., Organic Chemistry, 6th Ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J. : Pearson Prentice Hall, 2006.

GTF207/2-Analytical Chemistry Practical In this course students will be exposed to practicals involving absorption spectrometer, complexometric titration and ion exchange resins, electrogravimetry, electrode selective ions, infrared spectrometry, gas chromatography, atomic absorption spectrometry, visible spectrometry, flame ionisation spectrometry and high performance liquid chromatography. The course will be conducted through practical sessions.. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. James, M. M., Analytical Chemistry in a GMP Environment: A Practical Guide, Wiley. New York, 2000. Niessen, W. M., Liquid Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed. ,2006. Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd ed. West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007 Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed., 1999. Marshall, A. G. Fourier Transforms in NMR, Optical, and Mass Spectrometry: A User's Handbook: Elsevier, 1990. Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel Dekker, 2004. Jennings, W. Analytical Gas Chromatography, 1987 Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography, 4th Ed. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley- Interscience, 2004.

GTF208/2-Organic Chemistry Practical In this course, students will be exposed to practical involving organic chemistry knowledge to analyse functional groups and organic compounds both qualitatively and quantitatively. It will provide students with skill-based knowledge of organic analysis including distillation, gas chromatography, spectroscopy and extraction techniques.

122

List of text/reference books: 1. Pavia, D. L., Lampman, G. M. and Kriz, G. S. Introduction to Spectroscopy a Guide for Students of Organic Chemistry, 3rd Ed., Fort Worth: Harcourt College Publishers, 2001. Lehman, J. W. The Student's Lab Companion: Laboratory Techniques for Organic Chemistry, Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2004.

2.

GTF209/2-Chemistry of Pollutions and Environment This course will cover introduction to the environmental components, environmental act and water quality standard, nutricent and entrofication, heavy metals, biology ixygen demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand (COD), meteorology of air contamination, concept of water population, and water contaminants, distribution of air pollutant and environmental forensics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Daniel, B. B and Edward, A. K. Environmental Science : Earth as a Living Planet. United States of America : John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005. William, P. C. and Barbara, W. S. Environmental Science: A Global Concern. United States of America : McGraw Hill, 1997. Shradha, S., Manisha, S. and Ranjana, S. A Text Book of Environmental Studies. New Delhi : AITBS Publishers, 2005. Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) & Subsidiary Legislation. Kuala Lumpur : International Law Book Services (2007). Suzanna, M. I. Environmental Law in Malaysia. Bangi : Penerbit UKM, 2006. Winfield, A. Environmental Chemistry, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2000. Roy, M. H. Principles of Environmental Chemistry, RSC Publishing, Cambridge, U.K, 2007.

GTF210/3-Material Chemistry In this course students will be exposed to characteristics of materials, processing and the uses of metals, alloys, polymers, ceramics and composites also their importance in forensic cases investigation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. W.P. Naylor, J.C. Kessler, A. H. King, Introduction to Metal Ceramic Technology, Chicago : Quintessence Pub. Inc., 1992. G. Ubassy, Shape and Color: Key to Successful Ceramic Restorations, Chicago: Quintessence Pub. Co, Inc., 1993. Bradley D. Fahlman, Materials Chemistry, Springer, 1990. Janet M. Cronyn, Elements of Archeological Conservation, Taylor and Francis, 1990.

123

GTF211/3-Natural Product Chemistry In this course, students will be exposed to chemistry of natural products. Students will be introduced to biosynthesis natural products secondary metabolite. The synthesis routes of acetate, shikimate, mevolonate, mevolonate and alcoloid also will be introduced. The development and synthetic works on this type of products and their analogues will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stanforth, S. P., Natural Product Chemistry at a Glance, Blackwell Publishing, 2006. Torssel, K. B. G., Natural Product Chemistry: Mechanic and Biosynthetic Approach to Secondary Metabolism, John Wiley & Sons, 1982. Sarker, S. D. and Nahar, L., Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic and Natural Product Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2007. Hornback, J. M., Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005.

GTJ205/4-Nursing Foundation III The aim of this course is to introduce the undergraduate nursing students to the appropriate knowledge and skills in intervention therapeutic nursing. This course will also provide nursing students with the necessary knowledge and skills to act as competent and safe nurses. Students are required to attend lectures and clinical placements in surgical wards, CSSD, operation theatres, diagnostic units and the nursing skill laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Carpenito-Moyet, L.J., Nursing Diagnosis: Application to Clinical Practice, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. deWit, S.C., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, Elsevier Science, 2003. Taylor C., Lillies C. & Lemone P., Fundamentals of Nursing: The Art and Science of Nursing Care, 4th Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2001.

GTJ207/2-MedicalSurgical Nursing 11 (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) This course provides opportunities for the students to examine the theoretical and professional aspects of medical-surgical nursing practice. It focuses on the pathophysiology of diseases, management of medical/surgical and nursing components in the gastrointestinal and renal/urology system. The knowledge gained acts as a foundation for students to plan health promotion strategies for the different groups of client within the hospital and community. The concept of nursing is approached from the wellness illness continuum, holistic and individualised context.

124

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone & Burke, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 3rd Ed., Lippincott, London, 2004. Brunner, Brunner & Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, Pearson Education, New York, 2004. White, L & Duncan., G., Medical-Surgical Nursing, An Integrated Approach, 2nd. Ed.,Delmar, Australia, 2002.

GTJ208/2-Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing The aim of this course is to allow the undergraduate nursing students to develop knowledge and acquire the necessary skills for the care of neonatal and pediatric patients and problem solving in relation to neonatal and pediatric health, growth and development. Congruent with this knowledge and skills, students are expected to acquire the ability to deliver holistic nursing care to neonates and children in a tertiary or community hospital. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Rennie, J.M. & Roberton, N.R.C., A manual of Neonatal Intensive Care, 4th. Ed., London: Arnold, 2002. Olds, S.B., Ladewig, P.W., London, M.L., Maternal-Newborn Nursing: A Family and Community-Based Approach, 7th Ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., 2001. Ball, J.W., & Bindler, R.C., Pediatric Nursing: Caring For Children, 3rd Ed., New Jersey Pearson Education Inc., 2003.

GTJ209/3-Nursing Foundation II This course will help to develop a strong understanding of the basic nursing care concept in students., specifically the knowledge and skills related to activity of daily living (ADL). The course caters as the first attempt to general nursing care, which can later enable students to integrate the knowledge and skills gained in this course to other nursing disciplines. Students will learn specific theory and practice in order to fulfill the clients basic needs. Students are encouraged to understand human daily activities in the context of nursespatients interactions. These are in relation to topics of respiration, food and fluid intake, personal hygiene, excretion, body temperature, mobilisation, sleep and rest and maintenance of a safe environment. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Carpenito-Moyet, L.J., Nursing Diagnosis: Application to Clinical Practice, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. deWit, S.C., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, Elsevier Science, 2003.

125

3.

Taylor C., Lillies C. & Lemone P., Fundamentals of Nursing: The Art and Science of Nursing Care, 4th Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2001.

GTJ210/3-Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing This course provides students with knowledge on health philosophies, concepts, principles, models, criteria and strategies that will be utilised as a framework for primary health care in hospitals, homes and the community. This course also emphasises on the health care problems encountered and on ways to overcome them. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allender, J.A., Spradley, B.W., Community Health Nursing, 5th Ed., Lippincott William Wilkins, 2000. Pender, N.J., Murdaugh, C.L., Parsons, M. A., Health Promotion in Nursing Practice, 4th Ed., Pearson Education, 2001. Clement-Stone, S., McGuire, S.L., Eigsti, D.G., Comprehensive Community Health Nursing: Family, Aggregate, and Community Practice, 6th. Ed., Elsevier Science, 2002.

GTJ211/2-Medical -Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) This course provides opportunities for the students to examine the theoretical and professional aspects of medical-surgical nursing practice. It focuses on the pathophysiology of diseases, management of medical/surgical and nursing components in the cardiovascular and respiratory systems. The knowledge gained from this course serves as a foundation for students to plan health promotion strategies for the different group of clients within hospitals and the community. The concept of nursing is approached from the wellness -illness continuum, holistic and individualised context. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Medical Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th. Ed., New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008. Luckmann, J. & Sorensen, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing, 2nd Ed., W.B. Saunders, 2001. Smeltzer, S. & Barc, B., Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical and Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed, Philadelphia: Williams & Wilkins, 2004.

GTJ212/2-Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing This course is designed to allow undergraduate nursing students to accumulate knowledge and to develop skills necessary in the proper care of women and their families throughout pregnancy, labor, birth and the puerperium. The focus of this course will be on assisting students to acquire the necessary elements in providing care in relation to problems faced within the reproductive and gynecological health services.

126

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lowdermilk, DL & Perry, SE, Maternal Nursing, 6th Ed., USA: Mosby, Inc. 2003. Towle, MA, Maternal Newborn Nursing Care, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. 2009. Towle, MA & Adams, ED, Maternal-Child Nursing Care, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. 2008.

GTK201/3-Occupational Health This course introduces student to various safety hazards at workplace. Measures required to minimise risks of work injury due to these hazards will be discussed. Content of this course is streamlined with content of module IV of the Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. ILBS., Undang-undang Malaysia. Akta Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan Peraturan-Peraturan, 2005. ILBS., Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Kilang dan Jentera 1967 dan Peraturan-Peraturan, 2005. NIOSH., Keselamatan Pekerjaan. Manual Kursus Pegawai Keselamatan & Kesihatan, Modul 4, 2003.

GTK202/3-Pollution and Health This course introduces students to sciences of water, soil, atmosphere and wavelengths. Students are taught on the quality standards for water, soil, atmosphere and wavelengths. Students are exposed to strategy of pollution management and steps that can be taken to control and reduce pollution. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Calhoun, Y., Water Pollution. Chelsea House Pub., 150pp. ISBN: 0791082024, 2005. Mirsal, I. A., Soil Pollution: Origin, Monitoring & Remediation, Springer, 2004. Verlag. 252pp. ISBN: 3540401431. Behar Alberto., Noise Control: A Primer, Singular Pub-Group, San Diego, California, 2000. Glenn F. Knoll., Radiation Detection & Measurement, John Wiley & Sons., 1999. Ganesan Kumar. 1996. Air Toxics : Problems and Solution. Gordon & Breach Science Publishers, 2004.

127

GTK203/3-Occupational Health This course introduces student to various health hazards at workplace. Measures required to minimise risks of occupational diseases due to these hazards will be discussed. Content of this course is streamlined with content of module III of the Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. Herzstein JA, Bunn WB, Fleming LE, Harrington JM, Jeyaratnam J, Gardner IR, International Occupational & Environmental Medicine, London: Mosby. 1998. Sadhra SS, Rampal KG, Occupational Health: Risk Assessment and Management. Oxford: Blackwell Science, 1999. Koh D, Chia KS, Jeyaratnam J, Textbook of Occupational Medicine Practice, 2nd Ed. Singapore: World Scientific Publishing Co Pte Ltd., 2001.

2. 3.

GTK204/3-Environmental Chemistry This course emphasises the importance of chemistry knowledge (e.g. organics, inorganic and physical) and skills (e.g. spectrometry, chromatograph and photoioniser) in estimating amount of pollutants in an environment. Students are expected to understand underlying principles of field and laboratory analytical instruments. Design of plan for sampling pollutant, which effects the results of chemical analysis will also be discussed in reference to similar topic under the biostatistical course. Student must obtain a pass in Basic Chemistry course before taking this paper. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Swindells, Peter G, Chemistry for Environmental and Earth Sciences, CRC Press, 2006. Higson, Seamus, Analytical Chemistry, Oxford University Press, 2004.

GTN202/3-Principles of Food Preparation This course covers basic food chemistry and basic cooking methods for various types of foods such as meat, chicken, fish, vegetables, legumes and bakery products. This course will also discuss personal hygiene, sanitation and safety related to food preparation and the cooking of food. Besides the conventional method of cooking, the latest technique such as using microwave for the preparation of food will also be discussed. Factors influencing the structure, colour, texture and nutritional value during preparation of food will be stressed. Those enrolled in this course will have the opportunity to use some of the cooking equipment in the laboratory and to evaluate the effectiveness of the kitchen tools and equipments.

128

List of text/reference books: 1 2. 3. Freeland-Graves J.H., Peckham G.C., Principles of Food Preparation, Prentice Hall, 2002. Cataldo CB, Whitney EN, DeBruyne LK, Nutrition and Diet Therapy: Principles and Practice, 6th Ed., Thomson, 2002. Robert G.H. & Miller R.T., Food Preparation, 2nd Ed., American Technical Publishers, Inc., 1999.

GTN207/3-Principles of Nutrition This course will focus on the importance of essential nutrients and optimal nutrition in the growth process and human development. Students will be introduced to functions, needs and food sources for essential nutrients of the human diet. They will also learn the role of food and its relationship with the economy, psychology, sociology and culture. The students are expected to exhibit proper attention and attitude towards nutrition in terms of personal, family and community health. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. 3. 4. McGuire M & Beerman K. Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food, 1st Ed.. Thomson Woodsworth, 2007. Gibney M, Vorster H & Kok F. Introduction to Human Nutrition, 1st Ed.. Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002. Mahan LK & Arlin M, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, Philadelphia : Elsevier Science, 11th Ed., 2003. Boyle MA, Anderson SL, Personal Nutrition, 5th Ed., Thomson Learning, 2003.

GTN208/3-Nutritional Biochemistry This course will focus on metabolism and homeostasis of several key nutrients of macronutrients and micronutrients such as vitamins and minerals, body fluid and electrolyte balance, and inter-interaction between nutrients as well as the relationships between nutrients metabolism in maintaining optimal physiological and development of human body and also its relationship in the aetiology and development of chronic diseases such as cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, certain types of cancers and other nutritional-related disorders. Several aspects of utilisation and adaptation regulation related to nutrients metabolism will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Gropper SS, Smith JL, Groff JL. Advanced Nutrition and Human Nutrition. 4th Ed., Thomson Wadsworth, USA, 2005. Shills ME, Shike M, Ross AC, Caballero B and Cousins RJ. Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease. 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006.

129

3.

Gibney MJ, Macdonald IA, Roche HM. Nutrition and Metabolism, Blackwell Science Publishing, UK, 2003.

GTN209/3-Nutrition in a Life Cycle This course will focus on nutritional aspects and the problems related with the growth and physiological development of infants and the increasing nutritional demand during pregnancy and breastfeeding. The course will also emphasise on the nutrition and growth of children, teenagers, adults and elderly people. The discussions will cover nutritional issues and human development in their life cycle from the fetus to the elderly. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Worthington-Roberts, BS et al, Nutrition Throughout Life Cycle, 4th Ed., London, McGraw Hill, 2000. Brown JE, Isaacs JS, Krinke UB, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Wadsworth, 2004. P. Shetty, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Springer-Verlag Telos, 2003.

GTN210/2-Nutrition for Health and Fitness This course provides the student with thorough coverage of the role that nutrition plays in enhancing one's health, fitness and sport performance. The focus of the course will be on general effects of nutrition and exercise on health-related and sports-related fitness, nutrition for optimal health and physical performance, and the role of energy and nutrients as the key to all exercise and sports activities. Body composition and weight control will be discussed in relation to losing or gaining weight through diet and exercise. Current research and practical activities will be incorporated throughout. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Melvin H Williams Nutrition for Health, Fitness & Sport, 8th Ed., McGrawHill, 2007 Melinda M. Manore and Janice L. Thompson Sport Nutrition for Health and Performance - 1st Ed., Human Kinetics Robert E. C. Wildman, Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Brooks/Cole Pub Co, 2003

GTN211/3-Food Analysis This course will discuss food intake techniques, preservation and food sample preparation prior to analysis. In depth studies about the principles of physical and chemical analyses in determining physico-chemical properties and food nutrient contents will also be covered. Chemical analyses cover proximate analysis, determination of fat properties, fat content, detection of preservatives, colouring and contaminants. The students will also be exposed to the basic techniques of food microbiology.

130

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Suzanne Nielson, Food Analysis, 3rd Ed., Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, 2003. Pomeranz Y & Meloan CE, Food Analysis. Theory and Practice, 3rd Ed., New York, Chapman and Hall, 2000. Tee ES, Ismail MN, Nasir MA & Khatijah I, Nutrient Composition of Malaysias Foods, 4th Ed., Kuala Lumpur, Institute for Medical Research, 1997.

GTN212/3-Assessment of Nutritional Status This course will expose students to methods of nutritional evaluation in the individual and community. They will be introduced to direct and indirect methods of assessment of nutritional status. The focus is on food calculation and nutrient intake, anthropometric measurement, dietary evaluation, biochemical evaluation and clinical assessment. The students will collect data and use reference standards for the different stages of age and classification criteria. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Lee, R.D. and Nieman, D.C., Nutritional Assessment, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007. Jelliffe, O.D., The Assessment of Nutritional Status in the Community, Geneva: WHO, 2007 Sauberlich HE, Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 1999. Tee E. Siong et al., Nutrition Composition of Malaysian Food, 4th Ed., Kuala Lumpur: Malaysian Food Composition Database Programme, 1997. Bendich, A. and Deckelbaum, R.J. (ed.), Primary & Secondary Preventive Nutrition, Totowa (N.J., USA) : Humana Press, 2001.

GTP201/2- Linguistics for Speech Pathology This is an advance component of the linguistics course that focuses on various assessments of speech and language from the linguists perspective with reference to the main languages in Malaysia and dialectal variations of these languages. Students will be exposed to qualitative and quantitative methods in phonology, morphology, syntax, semantics, pragmatics and discourse. This course also emphasizes on the application of this knowledge in the management of speech pathology cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Buckley, B., Children's Communication Skills: From Birth to Five Years, Oxford: Routledge, 2003. Croft, W., Cognitive Linguistics, London: Cambridge University Press, 2004. Black, M. & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinician: A Practical Introduction. London: Hodder Arnold, 2003.

131

GTP202/3-Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders This is a basic course of human communication and swallowing disorders. This course focuses on the disorders of speech, language, voice, fluency, hearing and swallowing. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of communication and swallowing disorders. Overview of the basic principles of common management procedures for the individual with these disorders is also covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Shames, G. H., & Anderson, N. B., Human Communication Disorders: An Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2006. Hedge, M. N., Introduction to Communicative Disorders, 4th Ed., Austin: Pred., 2010. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and Disorders:From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2010.

GTP203/2-Speech Pathology Clinic I In this course, students are expected to engage actively in clinical observation session. The focus of observation is on the interviewing process and history taking skills, formal and informal assessment procedures, and on the techniques and intervention strategies for speech and language disorders. The students are also expected to prepare the materials for therapy and to undergo placement at several specialist clinic. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular Publication Groups, 1997. Hegde, M., Pocket Guide to Treatment in Speech-Language Pathology, 3rd Ed.,. San Diego, CA: Singular/ Thomson Learning, 2007. Kersner, M. & Wright, J. (Eds), Speech and Language Therapy: The Decisionmaking Process When Working With Children, 2nd Ed., London: David Fulton Publishers, 2001.

GTP204/2 - Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology This course provides knowledge on important aspects of paediatrics that are relevant to the field of audiology and speech pathology. It covers the normal aspects and conditions associated with prenatal, perinatal and postnatal periods, etiologies of communication disorders and their characteristics found in paediatric cases. Basic knowledge of the management of normal or abnormal paediatric cases seen by the paediatrician will also be covered in this course. This course also emphasizes on the application this knowledge in the management of speech pathology cases.

132

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allen, K. & Marotz, L., Developmental Profiles: Prebirth Through Eighth, 3rd Ed.,. Canada: Delmar Publishers, 1999. Behrman, R. E., Kliegman, R. M., & Jenson, H. B., Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics, 18th Ed., Philadephia: Elsevier, 2007. Schoenbrodt, L., Childhood Communication Disorders: Organic Bases, Clifton Park: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.

GTP205/2-Speech Acoustics and Phonetics This course provides fundamental knowledge on the production and perception of speech acoustics. It covers the basic knowledge on speech acoustics such as sound waves, resonance, frequency, intensity, acoustic features of vowels and consonants. Relationship between phonetic and acoustics in human communication will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Speaks, C. E., Introduction to Sound: Acoustics for the Hearing and Speech Sciences, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999. Kent R. D. & Read, C., Acoustic: Analysis of Speech, 2nd Ed., Canada: Delmar Learning, 2002. Ball, M. J. & Rahilly, J., Phonetics: The Science of Speech, London: Arnold, 1999.

GTP206/1-Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology This course focuses in depth on the practical aspects of phonetics based on the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). It emphasizes the transcription practices and analysis of normal and disordered speech sounds. Transcription practices based on IPA of dialectal variations in the Malay Language will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Edward, H. T., Applied Phonetics: The Sounds of American English, 3rd Ed., London: Delmar Learning, 2002. Martin, J., Ball, O. M., & Lowry, Methods in Clinical Phonetics, London: Whurr Publishers Ltd., 2001. Roach, P., English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course, 3rd Ed., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.

GTP207/2 - Speech Pathology Clinic II In this course, the students are required to conduct interviewing session under supervision to obtain history of the patients. They also have to work on building rapport with patients, especially the paediatric cases.

133

Depending on the supervisors decision, the students may be asked to assist the clinician during these sessions. The student also are required to discuss their therapy goals, therapy plan and the issues related to the diagnosis and prognosis of cases with their supervisor at the end of each clinical session. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular Publication Groups, 1997. Philips, B. J. & Ruscello, D. M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language Pathology, 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, 1988. Shipley, K. G. & McAfee, J. G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A Resource manual, 4th Ed., New York: Delmar Learning, 2008.

GTP208/3-Speech Disorders This is a theoretical course on the study of speech disorders and fluency disorders. The study of speech disorders focuses on the articulation disorders and phonological disorders. Meanwhile, the study of fluency disorders emphasizes on stuttering. The topics covered are definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of speech disorders and fluency disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessments and principles of interventions in managing individuals with speech disorders or fluency disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Zebrowski, P. M. & Kelly, E. M., Manual of Stuttering Intervention, San Diego: Singular/Thomson Learning, 2002. Bernthal, J. E. & Bankson, N. W., Articulation and Phonological Disorders, 6th Ed., Boston: Pearson/Allyn and Bacon, 2008. Bleile, K. M., Manual of Articulation and Phonological Disorders: Infancy Through Adulthood, 2nd Ed., Clifton Park, NY: Thomson-Delmar Learning, 2004.

GTS201/3-Exercise Physiology This course focuses on the effects of training and exercise on various systems such as the cardiorespiratory, muscular, endocrine, metabolic systems as well as bioenergetics. Discussion on the various methods of physiological assessments catering for the trained and untrained individual, the elderly and children will be included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Astrand P.O. and Rodahl, K. Textbook of Work Physiology, Champaign, IL:Human Kinetics, 2003. McAdrdle, W.D, Katch, Fl, Katch, VL., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition, and Human Performance, 5th Ed., Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 2001.

134

3.

Wilmore, JH and Costill, DL Physiology of Sport and Exercise, Champaign, IL:Human Kinetics, 2004.

GTS202/2-First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) In this course, ttudents will be introduced to first-aid techniques and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) methods to be used in various situations with the emphasis on sports related incidences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thygerson A., American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons First Aid, CPR and AED, 4th Ed., Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2005. National Safety Council, Standard First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2005. National Safety Council, Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2005.

GTS203/2-Kinantropometry The course will introduce students to the measurements of individual movement in connection with size, shape, composition and ratio. It will provide students with both theorectical and practical methods in assessing professional athletes from the structural and functional prospective with considerations to size differences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gore CJ (editor) Australian Sports Commission, Physiological Tests for Elite Athletes, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers, 2000. Marfell-Jones, M. & Olds, T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry X, London: Routledge, 2007. Eston R & Reilly T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry and Exercise Physiology Laboratory Manual: Test, Procedures and Data, London : Routledge, 2009.

GTS204/2-Test and Measurements for Sports Science This course introduces students to the terms, concepts and procedures related to the measurements and assessments of exercise and sports .These include validity and reliability of tests, their references, norms and criteria. Selection of methods, alteration dan building skill tests, physical fitness tests, effective serial tests, and the valuation of the merit score test relative to the absolute standard will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. Baumgartner, T. A., Jackson, A. S., Mahar, M. T. & Rowe, D. A., Measurement for Evaluation in Physical Education and Exercise Science, 8th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007.

135

2.

3.

Morrow, J.R., Jackson, A. W., Disch, J.G. & Mood, D.P., Measurement and Evaluation in Human Performance 3rd Ed, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Wood, T. M. & Zhu, W., Measurement Theory and Practice in Kinesiology, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2006.

GTS205/3-Sports Psychology Students will be exposed to the psychological skills and training strategies that can be applied to improve sports performance. The course will stress on the significance of cognitive and social processess in understanding sporting behaviour. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Cox, R., Sport Psychology: Concepts and Applications, 5th Ed., Columbus, OH: McGraw Hill, 2002. Gill, D., Psychological Dynamics of Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000. Weinberg, R. & Gould, D., Foundations of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000.

GTS206/3-Sports Training Methodology The course will cover topics such as sports competition, sports qualification, motor developmet training, planning and scheduling in sports. It will explain the methods utilised in perfecting a technique, body shape, tactical preparation and psychology. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Strength Training for Sport, Handbook of Sports Medicine and Science, An IOC Medical Commission Publication, Blackwell Science, 2002. Bompa T.O., Periodization: Theory and Methodology of Training, 4th Ed., York University, 2000. Bondarchuk, A Track and Field Training, Translated by James Riordan., Kiev: Zdotovye, 1986.

GTS207/3- Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports Introduction to basic badminton, soccer and volleyball skills and game play including the knowledge and skills of these games with consideration of relevant kinesiological, physiological, biomechanical and socio-psychological factors/principles. This course also emphasise on skill acquisition, performance, and analysis of these games

136

List of text/reference books : 1. 2. 3. Dearing, J., Volleyball Fundamentals, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003. Grice, T.A., Badminton - Steps to Success, 2nd ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2008. Mielke, D., Soccer Fundamentals. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003.

GTU201/2-Health and Society This course discusses the changes in disease patterns, health concepts and diseases, the relationship between patient and health professionals, domains of health services, medical and community institutions, survey on health and social changes, issues on morbidity, mortality, demography and nation development. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. McElroy, A., Townsend, P., Medical Anthropology in Ecological Perspective, 4th Ed., Westview Press, 2003. Graaff, J., What Is Sociology? Oxford University Press, 2002. Baer, H.A., Susser, I., Singer, M., Medical Anthropology and the World System, 2nd Ed., Greenwood Publishing Group, Incorporated, 2003.

GTX210/3Medical Radiation Physics II This course will expose students to the basic fundamentals of electricity, magnetism and modern physics and its role in the modern world and important connections with almost all areas of technological developments. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Taylor, J., Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers, 2nd Ed., Pearson Prentice Hal, 2004. Beiser, A., Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th Ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2003. Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley, 2007.

GTX212/3Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics The course will introduce mathematical theory related to differential equations. This includes first order ordinary differential equation, second order linear ordinary differential equation with constant coefficient, Laplace equation, Fourier series and partial differential equation.

137

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Kreyszig, E., Advance Engineering Mathematics, 8th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 1998. Arfken, G., Mathematical Methods for Physicists, 5th Ed., Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2000. Stroud, K. A., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Industrial Press, 2003.

GTX213/3 Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine This course will introduce basic science in nuclear medicine including the principles of radioactivity, radioisotopes production, internal dosimetry and radiation detection. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Saha, G.B., Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine, 2nd Ed., SpringerVerlag New York, LLC, 2001. Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2004. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Elsevier, 2003.

GTX214/3Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology This course will introduce the principles of basic sciences in the area of diagnostic radiology, imaging, focusing and conventional imaging. These include X-ray production and equipment, introduction to imaging, radiography production and factors that influence the quality of the radiograph. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee, WR & Ritenour ER, Medical Imaging Physics, 4th Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2002. Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farrs Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier, 2008. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. and Boone, J.M., The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2002.

138

6.3. Core Courses Level 300

139

GTA301/3-Basic Hearing Amplification Technology This course discusses topics related to hearing amplification devices. These include physical and electroacoustic features, types of hearing aids and earmoulds, evaluation and prescription of hearing aids, acoustic and electroacoustic modification and counseling. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Strategies for Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Roeser, R. J. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Treatment, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000.

GTA302/3-Audiology Clinic I In this course, students will have clinical attachment at audiology clinic to take case history, observe and perform basic audiological assessments. Students are expected to involve actively in all aspects with close supervision. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Stach, B. A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2010. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., and Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment, Practice Management Volumes I-III, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2008.

GTA303/3- Paediatric Audiology This course discusses the audiological assessments in paediatric population. Students will also learn appropriate test selection for children, necessary modification for special needs children, integrating test results, and explaining results and make appropriate suggestions to parents. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Madell, J. R., & Flexer, C., Pediatric Audiology, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2008. Bellis, T., Assessment and Management of Central Auditory Processing Disorders in the Educational Setting from Science to Practice, 2nd Ed., New York: Singular Publishing Group, 2003. Northem, J. L., & Downs, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Maryland: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.

3.

140

GTA304/4-Audiology Clinic II In this course, students will have clinical attachment to practice history taking, audiological assessments (subjective and objective test), hearing aid prescription, verification and validation, and ear-impression taking under supervision. Students are expected to be involved actively in all clinical aspects but under lesser supervision. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1996. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1998.

3.

GTA305/3-Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology This course discusses assistive listening devices (ALDs) including vibrotactile aids, loop, FM (frequency modulated), and infrared systems.. The selection criteria for cochlear implant, midbrain implant and bone anchored hearing aids (BAHA) and other implantable hearing aids will be discussed in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dillon, H., Hearing Aids, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000. Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Strategies For Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Zeng, F. G. & Popper, A. N., Cochlear Implants: Auditory Prostheses and Electric Hearing (Springer Handbook of Auditory Research), New York: Springer, 2006.

GTA306/3- Auditory Rehabilitation This course discusses rehabilitation involved in hearing impaired patients at all stages of life. It also discusses about the importance of team work (audiologist, speech-language pathologist, teacher, social worker) and the roles of other professionals in aural rehabilitation. The selection of communication mode (e.g. cued speech, signing etc) based on residual hearing, speech and language development of hearing impaired will also been discussed.

141

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hull, R.H.H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Tye-Murray, N., Foundations of Aural Rehabilitation: Children, Adults, and Their Families, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Johnson, C. E., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural Rehabilitation, San Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 1999.

GTB307/3-Medical Parasitology This course introduces the terminology, classification and nomenclature used in medical parasitology. Routine and current diagnostic methods and their underlying principles used for identification of parasitic helminthes and protozoa and/or detection of their indicators found in stool and blood samples are incorporated in the practical lessons. Discussions on the morphology, life cycle, epidemiology, brief pathogenesis, prevention and control of several medically important helminthes and protozoa are also included. Characteristics of important mosquitoes and methods to control the vectors will also be discussed during both lecture and practical sessions. Finally, students will also be brief on the organisation, function and administration of a medical parasitology laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bogitsh, B. J., Carter, C. E. & Oeltmann (2005). T. N. Human Parasitolog (3rd Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Halton, D.W., Behnke, J.M. & Marshall, I., (Eds.) (2001). Practical exercises in Parasitology. Cambridge: University press. Leventhal, R., & Cheadle, R.F. (2002). Medical Parasitology: A Selfinstructional Text (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F A. Davis Publishing Co. Parija, S.C. (2006). Textbook of Medical Parasitology (3rd ed.). New Delhi: All India Publishers & Distributors.

GTB310/3-Clinical Biochemistry In this course the student will be taught the theory and pathophysiological biochemistry of the human body. They will also be exposed to the principles of biochemical tests in the laboratory, and the interpretation of results from laboratory analyses performed on samples. The student are also expected to acquire some skills in performing laboratory diagnostic procedures in chemical pathology including specimen receiving and processing, reagent preparation related to biochemical analyses, performing diagnostic tests for liver function, renal, heart, pancreas, gastrointestinal tract and measurement of pH, acid-base haemostasis of the body, electrolytes, determination of enzyme activities, blood glucose protein, albumin, urea, cholesterol and triglyceride levels, and other major biochemical parameters in diagnostic biochemistry. The students will also be exposed to the manual diagnostic procedures and the application of laboratory automation for clinical diagnosis, quality control programme and laboratory administration.

142

Furthermore, students will be exposed to actual working environment through short visits to the Chemical Pathology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Bishop, M.L., Duben-Engelkirk, J.L., & Fody, E.P. (2000). Clinical Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Burtis, C.A., & Ashwood, E.R. (2001). Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders.

GTB315/2-Medical Virology and Mycology This course will provide the student with knowledge on general characteristics of medically important viruses and fungi, the role of organisms in disease and health, the source, reservoirs and transmission of viral and fungal diseases and its pathogenesis. This course will also provide the students with skills in handling and processing of clinical specimens and various techniques in the identification of pathogenic viruses and fungi (staining, culture, serology, molecular) and the advantages and limitations of these techniques. Knowledge and techniques related to laboratory procedures - antibiotic sensitivity test, serological tests, rapid diagnosis and tests for viral and fungal infections will also be taught. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scotts Diagnostic Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 2. (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick & Adelbergs Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill. Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennetts Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby.

5.

GTB316/3-Transfusion Science and Blood Banking In this course the students will learn the principles of blood transfusion sciences and blood banking which include the theoretical and practical aspects of immunology and genetics of the human blood group systems. The student will also be exposed to the knowledge and be trained with appropriate skills required to perform and manage important pre-transfusion tests, blood collection, preparation and processing of blood, storage of blood and their fractions /components, maintenance of blood/blood components, implementation of quality control programs, transfusion laboratory safety and related aspects of management of the transfusion services at hospitals or medical centres. Students will be exposed to actual working environment through short attachments at the Transfusion Medicine Unit, Hospital Universiti Sains Malaysia.

143

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2005). Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practice (5th Ed.). NY: F.A. Davis Co. Roback J.D. (ed.) (2008).Technical Manual, American Association of Blood Banks, (16th Ed.). American Association of Blood Banks (AABB). Rudmann, S.V. (2005). Textbook of Blood Banking and Transfusion Medicine, (2nd Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science.

GTB317/3-Advanced Haematology This course will relate the basic principles of hematology learned in the Basic Hematology course with the pathophysiology of blood dyscracias due to deficiency of factor(s) in the synthesis and function of normal blood to genetics and/or environmental factors. Special emphasis will be given to diseases involving blood and related systems frequently found in clinical hematology practice such as nutritional anaemia, hereditary and acquired haemolytic anemias, benign leucocytes disorders, leukemias and related diseases and genetics of haematological malignancies. Examination and assessment of peripheral blood and bone marrow smears, morphology of red cell inclusions, bleeding disorders due to vascular, platelets and blood coagulation factors, thrombotic disorders, antithrombosis treatment, automation in hematology and management of hematology laboratory. Planning and implementation of quality control programme, inventory, assessment and purchasing of equipment for haematology laboratory services are some of the skills that will be imparted to students. Students will also be exposed to actual working environment through short attachments at the Haematology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis (5th Ed.) NY: F.A. Davis Co. Hoffbrand V., Moss P., and Pettit J. (2006). Essential Haematology (5th Ed.) London: Blackwell Publishing. Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science.

GTB318/3-Pharmacology II This course is an extension of GTB214/3 - Basic Pharmacology. Students will be exposed to a more detailed treatise of pharmacokinetics and pharmodynamics including pharmacogenetics, cellular pharmacology, pharmacogenomics and pharmacoepidemiology. Students with also be able to carry out practicals on in vitro and in vivo drug efficacy testings. Emphasis will be given to topics related to drug discovery via exposure to methods of chemical analyses for drugs and drug metabolites and some aspects of the methods involved in high through put screenings for new drugs.

144

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Craig, C.R., and Stitze, l R.E. (eds) (2003). Modern Pharmacology With Clinical Applications (6th Ed.). NY: Little Brown & Co. Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co. Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd.

GTD308/3-Therapeutic Diet Preparation This course gives practical training in the methods of therapeutic diet preparation for various disease conditions. Usage of foods for meal preparation and the minimisation of food wastage will be discussed during diet preparation. Purchase of raw materials, calculation of the nutrient contents in a prepared food item, preparation methods, food serving and sensory evaluation will be emphasised. Lectures on therapeutic diet preparation protocols will be given before the practical session. Assessment will be based on the students ability in selecting/purchasing raw materials, nutrient calculations, demonstration of food serving and sensory evaluation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.

GTD310/4-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I This course provides clinical training to the students with the intention of enhancing their dietetic skills while giving medical nutrition therapy to the patients in hospital wards. This internship programme covers individual patient approach, bed side counseling, nutrient intake analysis and therapeutic diet planning according to patients' dietary requirements based on diagnosis and medical report. Activities such as assessment of nutritional status and diet surveillance are also included. The students are required to give diet education to patients and their families. The students will understand the role and importance of dietitians in a healthcare team. Upon completion of this course the students are expected to submit case reports and to give case presentation of their respective case studies. List of text/reference books: 1. Hendricks KM, Duggan C., and Walker WA., Manual of Paediatric Nutrition, 4th Ed., BC Decker, 2005.

145

2. 3.

Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007. Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.

GTD311/3-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I This course will explain the rationale of modifying normal diet to therapeutic diet in terms of nutrient composition, texture and presentation. It enables students to understand the importance of therapeutic diet in the prevention and treatment of various diseases. Topics include dietary management of gastrointestinal diseases, cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, inborn errors of metabolism, body weight control, eating disorders, failure to thrive, food allergy, food intolerance and rehabilitation. The application of food exchange lists and various dietary guidelines will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Mahan K.et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.

GTD315/2-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II This course is a continuation of Principles of Diet Therapy I. This course will discuss principles and dietary management including the physiological and biochemical changes that occur during renal diseases, hepatobiliary diseases, cancer, skeletal and muscle diseases, pre and post operation conditions, trauma and burns. This course also deals with pediatric nutrition, total enteral and parenteral nutritions. Each topic will discuss about the theoretical and practical aspects of medical nutrition therapy that has to be given to the patients which includes assessment, planning, implementation, evaluation and documentation of the nutritional care processes. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.

GTD317/4-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I This course is a continuation of the Dietetic Internship I course. This course will focus on dietetic services at special units in hospitals and clinics such as ICU, CCU, pediatric, hypertension unit and diabetes mellitus clinic.

146

Evaluation of nutritional status, specific diet treatment and diet surveillance of patients before discharge will also be conducted. Patient diet management in wards whether normal, therapeutic or effective enterel-parenteral and the lag of diet regime planning including the evaluation of the effectiveness diet regimes will also be discussed. Students will be introduced to nutritional status evaluation and therapeutic care of HIV, kidney, neuro-musular and skeletal systems diseases patients and those who suffer from cancer. Those enrolled in this course will also learn about topics related to operations and burns patients. Ethics and bed side counseling procedures during diet treatment session will be focussed in order to enhance students communication skills. This will be undertaken with counselors. Emphasis will be on communicative ability with the patient's family especially on the diet of patients suffering from cancer and HIV. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Werbach MR, Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press, 2000. Skipper A (ed.), Dietitian's Handbook of Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition, 2nd Ed., Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 1998. Nelms M., Long, S. and Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy: A Case Study Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.

GTD318/4-Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I This course exposes students to practicals involving the handling of cases in the outpatient clinics. They are expected to be able to translate diet therapy theory into practice ensuring that they will easily understand diseases requiring nutritional intervention. They will also be taught on how to change patients' nutritional habit by using counselling techniques and history of prevalence. It is expected that this internship will effectively improve their skills required for nutritional counselling sessions. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008. Bauer K, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development, Wadsworth, 2002. Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007.

GTF300/2-Biological Evidence This course will introduce students to multiple biological specimens such as plant or animal origin that are found at the crime scenes including the methods of observing, describing and collecting them, their salient morphological features that enable identification and the procedures used in the laboratory to investigate these evidence.

147

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Byrd, J.H. and Castner, J. L., Forensic Entomology: The Utility of Arthropods in Legal Investigations, CRC Press, 2000. Robertson, J., Forensic Examination of Fibres, Taylor & Francis, London, 1999. Saferstein, R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. 1 to 3, Prentice Hall Regents, New Jersey, 1982

GTF301/3-Physical Evidence This course will introduce students to the physicochemical properties of various kinds of physical evidence commonly encountered in crime investigation such as paint, glass, fibres, plastics, soil, metals, and plant pigments and narcortics. The physical and chemical properties of natural products, polymers, fibres, and physical and chemical aspects of paint characterisation form part of the syllabus. The students are also introduced to five specific scientific criminal investigations involving i) Fingerprint Analysis, ii) Questioned documents, iii) Lamp filament examination in motor vehicle accidents, iv) Restoration of erased numbers on the vehicles involved in theft, murder, etc. and v) Detection of counterfeit coins and currency. These topics require knowledge of chemical and physical principles of paper analysis, physical and chemical development of latent prints and chemical etching techniques. Various instrumental methods of analysis of physicochemical evidence are also included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science: An Introduction to Scientific and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2003. Brian Caddy, Taylor and Francis, Forensic Examination of Glass and Paint, 2001. Ron Morris, Forensic Handwriting Identification: Fundamental Concepts and Principles, Academic Press, 2000.

GTF305/4-Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs This course will describe the concept of poison, multiple poisoned material, chemistry and appearance of poisoned materials, multiple procedures and techniques (including instruments) used to extract, identify and profile poisonous materials from autopsy specimens and other biological materials according to their chemical nature. It will also entail the chemical classification and identification of drugs of abuse by chemical methods of analysis and examination of common poisons and drugs by conventional chemical methods and modern instrumentation. Absorption and distribution of toxicants according to their chemistry, biochemical pathways, and interpretation of results obtained by chemical analyses and instrumentation is also included.

148

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cole, M. D., The Analysis of Controlled Substance, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2003. Flanagan, R. J., Taylor, A. A., Watson, I. D. & Whelpton, R., Fundamentals of Analytical Toxicology, New Jersey: Wiley-Interscience, 2008. Jickell, S., Negrusz, A., Moffat, A. C, Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke Analytical Forensic Toxicology, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2008. Karch, S. B., Postmorterm Toxicology of Abused Drugs, Steven B. Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2008. Moffat, A.C., Osselton, M. D., widdop, B. & Galichet, L.Y., Clarke's Analysis of Drugs and Poisons, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2004.

GTF306/3-Fire Investigation This course will introduce the students to the chemistry of fire, the various physicochemical properties of various types of fuels and their combustion properties, the procedures to be followed with hazardous chemicals and the concept of fire investigation and the evidence that can be collected in many types of fire scenes including arson. Students will be visiting the Fire and Rescue Academy at Wakaf Tapai inTerengganu for a practical session of 3-5 days. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. David, J. icove and John D. Dehaan, Forensic Fire Scene Reconstruction, Prentice Hall, 2003. John and D., Kirks Fire Investigation, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2002. Redsicker, D.R., Practical Fire and Arson Investigation, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1997.

GTF309/3-Forensic DNA Analysis This course will explain the structure and chemistry of DNA, and its uniqueness. The lecture also explains VNTR polymorphism, the various protocols in DNA fingerprinting -DNA extraction and purification and the various chemical components used in the preparation of PCR mastermix, PCR amplified microsatellite analysis with particular reference to environmentally degraded biospecimen, mitochondrial and plant DNA typing and their usefulness in personal and specimen identification. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Norah Rudin and Keith Inman, An Introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2001. John Butler and John M. Butler, Biology and Technology Behind STR Markers, Academic Press, 2001. Bruce Budowle, Jenifer Smith and Tamyarah Moretti, DNA Typing Protocols: Molecular Biology and Forensic Analysis, Eaton Pub. Co., 2000.

149

GTF311/3-Forensic Anthropology This course will introduce the basic concepts, philosophies, methodologies and techniques used in forensic anthropology. It includes the understanding of human anatomy based mainly on sex, age and race assessment including individual identification using skeletal remains. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. John G. Clement and David L. Ranson, Craniofacial Identification in Forensic Medicine, Arnold, New York, 1998. Iscan, M.Y. and Helmer, R. P., eds., Forensic Analysis of The Skull Cranio Facial Analysis, Reconstruction, and Identification, Wiley Liss Inc., New York, USA, 1993. Krogman, W.M. and Iscan, M.Y., The Human Skeleton in Forensic Medicine, Charles C.Thomas, Illinois, USA, 1986.

3.

GTF312/3-Organic Chemistry III In this course, the students will be exposed to organic chemistry with the topics that have not been covered in Organic Chemistry I and II. Topics on nomenclature, structures and properties of amines, carboxylic acids, condensation and alpha-substitution reactions of carbonyl compounds, carbohydrates, nucleic acid and proteins will be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Sarker, S. D. and Nahar, L. Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic and Natural Product Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2007. Morrison, R. T. and Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, 6th Ed, Pearson Education, Singapore, 2005. Smith, J. G. Organic Chemistry, McGraw-Hill, 2008. McMurry, J. E. Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed, Brooks/Cole, 2008. Hornback, J. M. Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005. Bruice, P. Y. Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007.

GTF313/3-Food Chemistry In this course, students will be exposed to food chemistry including classification and structure of carbohydrate, protein, oil and fat. Food flavours and additives also will be covered with examples. Students also will be exposed to food forensics principles and knowledge and the importance of food quality control. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Belitz, H.-D., Grosch, W. and Schieberle, P. Food Chemistry, Hornback, J. M. Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005. Damodaran, S., Parkin, K. L. and Fennema, O. R. Fennema's Food Chemistry,

150

4. 5. 6.

Akoh, C. C. and Min, D. B. Food Lipids: Chemistry, Nutrition, and Biotechnology, CRC Press/Taylor & Francis Group, Boca Raton, 2008. Frey, C. and Rouseff, R. Natural Flavors and Fragrances : Chemistry, Analysis, and Production, Carl : American Chemical Society, Washington, DC, 2005. Otles, S. Methods of Analysis of Food Components and Additives, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2005.

GTF314/2-Forensic Serology This course will introduce the chemistry of antigen and antibody molecules and their specificities and to the chemistry of ABO blood group antigens. This course describes the various biochemical genetic markers and various chemical and electrophoretic techniques to detect them. The chemical components in semen and saliva and the chemical methods applied to detect semen and saliva stains are highlighted. This course also explains the importance of blood groups and the various biochemical genetic markers to identify a person. Highly polymorphic HLA system and its use in identification are also introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bidwell J.L., Navarrete C. and Bodmer W.F., Histocompatibility Testing, Imperial College Press, 2000. Saferstein R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II and III, Regents/Prentice HalL, New Jersey, 1993. Issitt P.D., Applied Blood Group Serology, 3rd Ed., Montgomery Scientific Publication, 1985

GTJ309/2-Critical Care Nursing This course provides opportunities for the students to examine the theoretical and professional knowledge of critical nursing practice. It focuses on the principles of managing clients in the general intensive care, coronary care, trauma care and cardiothoracic care units. The concept of nursing is approached from the wellness-illness continuum, holistic and individualised context. The teaching modes of this course are on line teaching, problem-based learning, lectures, demonstrations, and clinical practicum. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P., Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003. Morton, P.G., Fontaine, D.K., Hudak, C.M. & Gallo, B.M., Critical Care Nursing: A Holistik Approach, 8th. Ed., Philadelphia : Lippincolt, 2005. Woods, S.L., Froelicher, E.S.S., & Motzer, S.U., Cardiac Nursing, 4th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott, 2000.

151

GTJ310/2-MedicalSurgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) This course is designed to introduce and expose students to the theoretical and clinical nursing aspects of endocrine and musculoskeletal systems. It focuses on the risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations, treatment and surgical intervention in relation to endocrine and musculoskeletal systems. The knowledge gained will assist students in planning and the implementation of nursing interventions to the clients in the hospital and community settings. Application of previous knowledge such as daily living activities, therapeutic intervention, pharmacology and nursing ethics will also assist students to deliver effective and holistic care to the clients. Clinical competencies training will be obtained from the nursing laboratory and the hospital. On line forums are used in teaching this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. LeMone, P., Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003. Smeltzer, S.C. Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S. (Editor), Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Porth, C.M., Pathophysiology: Concepts of Altered Health Status, 7th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2004.

3.

GTJ311/2- Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing This course provides opportunity for students to examine the theoretical and professional knowledge of psychiatric and mental health conditions. It focuses on concepts in mental health and various psychiatric diseases that will be discussed in relation to treatment and prevention. The knowledge gained from this course will form a strong foundation for students to plan health promotion strategies for the different group of clients within the hospital and community. The concept of nursing is approached from the wellness-illness continuum which includes the holistic and individualised approach. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Shives L.R., Basic Concepts of Psychiatric & Mental Health Nursing, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2001. Barry, P.D., Mental Health and Mental Illness, 7th Ed., Philadelphia:J.B. Lippincott, 2002. Videbeck, S.L., Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing, Philadelphia:J.B. Lippincott, 2001.

152

GTJ312/6-Research Project The research project will provide the students with the theories and knowledge in research process. It will also expose the student with the various methodology and scientific writing in research. The course will provide the student the opportunity to involve in research presentation in local conferences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Fowler, J., Jarvis, P., Chevannes, M., Practical Statistics for Nursing and Health Care, Leicester: John Wiley, 2002. Brink, P.J. & Wood, M.J., Basic Steps in Planning Nursing Research: From Question to Proposal, 4th Ed., Boston : Jones and Bartlett, 1994. Polit, D.F., Beck, C.T., & Hungler, B.P., Essentials of Nursing Research: Methods, Appraisal and Utilization, 5th Ed., Philadelphia : Lippincott, 2001.

GTJ313/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Opthalmology) This course will provide theoretical knowledge of medical-surgical nursing related to neurology, otorhinolaryngology and opthalmology. It covers the risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations and diagnostic procedures. Knowledge acquired will be useful in the management of nursing care and health promotion strategies for various groups of patients in the hospital and community. Application of previous knowledge such as daily living activities, therapeutic intervention, pharmacology and nursing ethics will also assist students to deliver an effective and holistic care to the clients. Clinical competencies training will be obtained from the nursing laboratory and the hospital. On line lectures and problem based learning, discussion and demonstration of skills are used in teaching this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Porth, C.M., Pathophysiology: Concepts of Altered Health States, 7th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2004. Smeltzer, S.C., & Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S. (Editor), Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. LeMone, P., Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.

3.

GTJ314/2-Nursing Education This course provides the theoretical and evaluative methodologies in health education for clients, family members, and organisational staff. It prepares students to plan and to provide teaching and learning in hospital and community. Students will be given the opportunity to develop health education pamphlet and deliver health care teaching at the bed side.

153

Different approaches such as developing teaching plan, microteaching skills and conducting clinical teaching for clients, family members or staff will be used to evaluate students. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. De Young, S., Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2003. Cutchiffe, J.R., Butterworth, T. & Proctor, B., Fundemental Themes in Clinical Supervision, London : Routledge, 2001. White, R., Ewan, C., Clinical Teaching in Nursing, 2nd Ed., Nelson Thornes, 1997.

GTJ315/2-MedicalSurgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Haematology and Oncology) This course will provide opportunity for the students to examine the theoretical and practical aspect of medicalsurgical nursing practice. It focuses on the pathophysiology of diseases, management of medical/surgical and nursing components in dermatology, immunology, hematology and oncology. The knowledge gained from this course serves as a strong foundation for students to plan health promotion strategies for the different group of clients within the hospital and community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Porth, C.M., Pathophysiology: Concepts of Altered Health States, 7th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2004. Smeltzer, S.C. & Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S. (Editor), Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. LeMone, P., Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003.

3.

GTJ316/2-Gerontological Nursing This course exposes the students to physical, physiological and psychological changes of an individual in relation to the ageing process. Nursing management is focused on the care of the elderly with complex health problems. Current issues involving the elderly are also seriously taken into account. This course will provide opportunities for students to contribute ideas in overcoming these problems. Holistic nursing care practices will be given priority during the delivery of care to the elderly. Social issues that arise pertaining to elderly, facilities and support services available will be taken into consideration in delivering holistic nursing care to the elderly. Students are also introduced to The Malaysian and International Policy for the Elderly and are expected to practice it.

154

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ebersole, P. & Hess, P., Geriatric & Nursing Healthy Aging, Philadelphia: Mosby, 2001. Eliopoulas, C., Gerontological Nursing 5th Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2001. Wold, G.H. Basic Geriatric Nursing, 3rd Ed., Mosby, 2004.

GTJ317/2-Principles of Health Management This course exposes students to basic knowledge of the principles and theories of health management in hospital. It addresses issues such as management concepts and evolutions, management process, nature of organisation, basic functions of a health care manager, financial management, leadership organisation development and quality improvement in the health care system. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Liebler, J.G., McConnel, .R., Management Principles for Health Care Professionals, 4th Ed., Jones & Bartlett Publishers, Inc., 2004. Kelly-Heidenthal, P. Nursing Leadership and Management, New York, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2003. Margnis, B.L. & Huston, C.J. Leadership Roles and Management Functions in Nursing Theory and Applications, California, USA: Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2006.

GTK301/4-Environmental & Occupational Toxicology This course explained the principle of polluted substances which released to environment and their toxicology effect to the living things and human. Students will be introduced to toxicology definition, types of toxicology test and interpretation of toxicology data. This course also discussed basic immunology concept, types of tissue and lymphoid cell; types, and molecule functions; antigen concept, immunogenic, antigenicity and immunogenecity and immunisation and immunopathology concept. Application of antigen-antibody reaction in diagnosis will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stanley EM, Toxicological Chemistry and Biochemistry, Lewis Publishers, 2003. Clements, WH, Community Ecotoxicology, John Wiley & Son,Ltd., 2002. Paul Illing, Toxicity & Risk : Context, Principles and Practice, Routledge, London, 2001. A.Wallace Hayes, Principles and Methods of Toxicology, 4th Ed.. Taylor & Francis, 2001.

155

GTK302/3-Environmental and Occupational Health From Engineering Perspective This course introduces theory and application of engineering knowledge especially mechanical and civil aspects to reduce the level of contaminated substances in workplace environment. Prevention actions regarding indoor polluted phenomenon in building are also discussed. Civil engineering aspect to reduce Sick Building problem and accident will be included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Noel De Nevers, Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 2000. Uniform Building By-Laws, MDC Publishers, 2000. Mackanzie L. Davis & Susan J. Masten, Principles of Environmental Engineering and Science, McGraw-Hill, 2004, Code of Practice Indoor Air Quality, Department of OSH, Malaysia, 2005.

GTK303/3-Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management In this course, the students will be exposed to waste classification and different ways to distinguish them. This course also introduces related Acts related to disposing solid waste, scheduled waste and radioactive waste. Analysis techniques and methods to handle different wastes also discussed. Furthermore, students will also be exposed to labeling methods, wrapping, storing, transporting and waste disposal. Safety aspects in how to handle waste are also explained. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974, International Law Books Services, 2005. Isa Baud, Johan Post & Christine Furedy, Solid Waste Management and Recycling : Actors, Partnerships & Policies in Hyderabad, India & Nairobi, Kenya. Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004. William C. Blackman, Basic Hazardous Waste Management, 3rd Ed.. CRC Press. 2001. Grover Velma, I., Solid Waste Management, Rotterdam, 2000.

3. 4.

GTK304/3-Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminated Materials This course is a continuation of GTF 201/4. It is a more advance course dealing with measuring and monitoring contaminants. In this course, students will be taught in detailed the methods of sampling, sample handling and analytical instrumentations such as AAS, GCMS, HPLC to measure various types of polluted in occupational health and hygiene. Student will also be exposed in creating monitoring plan which are used in monitoring of contaminated substances from the environment and workplace. The latest technologies such as Geographical Information System and Radio Frequency Environmental Tracking System to monitor the environment will also be explained.

156

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Fifield, F.W. and Haines, P.J., Environmental Analytical Chemistry Blackwell Science, UK., 2000. G.W.Ware., Reviews of Environmental Contamination & Toxicology. Springer, 2001. Friedrich, R. and Reis, S., Emission of Air Pollutants: Measurement, Calculation and Uncertainties, 1st Ed. Springer, UK., 2004. Vallero, D., Environmental Contaminant : Assessment and Control AP, London, 2004.

GTK305/3-Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases This course further enhances the knowledge acquired in Occupational and Environmental Toxicology Course.. Various diseases from polluted environment and workplace will be discussed. Disease invasion concept, their symptom and related medical check up to overcome of the diseases will be discussed. Health surveillance and prevention also will be emphasised. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Annalee Yassi, Tord Kjellstrm, Theo de Kok & Tee Guidotti, Basic Environmental Health WHO, UNEP Oxford University Press, 2001. Charles D. Reese, Occupational, Health and Safety Management : A Practical Approach. Lewis Publishers, 2003. Joseph La Dou., Current Occupational and Environmental Medicine (Lange Medical Books), 3rd ed., 2003. Herman Koran, Environmental and Occupational Health, 2nd ed. CRC Press. 2004.

GTK306/3-Environmental & Occupational Emergency This course exposes the students to the main disaster and accident which already happened or likely to be encountered in Malaysia or Southeast Asia region which have negative impact to the workers and the environment. Ways ro prevent disaster and to create emergency response plan (ERT) and emergency rescue team (ERT) will be discussed. Further more, student also will be taught on the related knowledge in manner how to coop with emergency instrument, emergency rescue and fire drill techniques. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Paul A. Erickson, Emergency Response Planning for Corporate and Municipal Managers, Academic Press. 1999. Stanley A. Greece, International Resources Guide to Hazardous Chemicals : Manufacturers, Agencies, Organizations & Sources of Information, William Andrew Publishing, 2003.

157

3. 4.

J. Paul Leigh, Steven Markowitz, Marianne Fahe & Philip Landrigen, Costs of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses, 4th Ed. University of Michigan Press, 2003. Paul Parcell, Disaster Prep 101 : Tthe Ultimate Guided Emergency Readiness. Info Quest, 2004.

GTK307/3-Occupational Rehabilitation This course introduces theory and process of rehabilitation and their applications to help workers suffering from injuries to recover. It also highlighs the roles of safety and health officer in monitoring the rehabilitation programme in workplace. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Maureen F. Dollard, Anthony H. Winefield & Helen R. Winefield, Occupational Stress in The Service Professions, Taylor & Francis Inc., 2003. Menckel, E. & Westerholm, P., Evaluation in Occupational Health Practice. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999. Ann Allart, W., An Occupational Perspective of Health. Thorofare, NJ: SLACK, Inc., 1998. Brenda, S., Managing Disability at Work: Improving Practice in Organisations, 1991.

GTN301/3-Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum This course exposes students to communities such as the squatter population, handicap homes, old age homes, pregnant mothers, health care clinics and centers for a period of 4 weeks to promote health activity and to educate the community on incorrect nutritional habits. This course also enables the students to face real life situation as dietitians in the community. The students are required to be involved and to conduct educational activity either in the form of talks or demonstrations in order to increase the awareness of selected populations towards acquiring optimal nutrition. Students will also gather knowledge about the role of a selected health care agency in a community setup. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Homan, M.S., Promoting Community Change- Making it Happen in the Real World, Belmont Thompson Higher Education, 2008. Nutrition Society, Gibney M.J., (Editors), Public Health Nutrition, Blackwell Publishers, 2003. Heber D, Nutrition for Primary Care, Saunders W B Co, 2000. Morgan JB, Dickerson JW (Eds.), Nutrition in Early Life John Wiley & Sons, Incorporated, 2003.

158

GTN309/3-Nutrition and Diseases This course covers selected clinical situations requiring individual nutrition regimes. Discussions of diseases related to the gastrointestinal, cardiovascular, urinary, endocrine and nervous systems will be undertaken. In addition, aspects of diversity of treatment, effect of drugs, radiation and operation-related condition such as trauma, burn, cancer, pregnancy, insufficient protein nutrient, retardation of growth, pre and post surgical, diarrhea etc. will becovered. Metabolic changes related to diseases, drug and food interactions, patient health condition and preventive aspects will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ganong WF., Review of Medical Physiology, 21st Ed., Appleton & Lange, 2003. P. Kumar, Clark, Clinical Medicine, 5th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2005. Vinay Kumar, Nelso Fausto, Abdul Abbas, Robbins & Cotnan Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2004.

GTN310/2-Food and Nutrition Toxicology Food toxicology covers food safety during handling, preparation, processing, storage and food services and lectures on diseases normally causes by water and food contaminants. The main causes of food poisoning including microorganisms, toxic wastes, insects and heavy metals are discussed. Preventive procedures and the issue of misleading consumption of food fortification agents and food additives will also be discussed. The role of government agencies or specific bodies such as HACCP and GMP requirements of factories and other food industries in ensuring safety of food will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Helferich W, Winter CK, Food Toxicology, CRC Press, 2000. Ray B, Fundamental Food Microbiology, 3rd Ed., CRC Press, 2003. Stanley, T. T. Omaye, Omaye T. Omaye, Food and Nutritional Toxicology, Marcel Dekker, 2004.

GTN311/3-Food Service Management This cource discusses the important aspects of catering, planning and food service management, menu planning, selection of laboratory equipments and food service system. Students are exposed to methods, principles and preparation techniques of nutritious and tasty food in huge quantities. Food safety and sanitation will also be discussed. Dynamic flows of food from the purchasing stage up to the serving of clients within time constraints are discussed.

159

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Knight JBL & Korschevar LH, Quantity of Food Production, Planning and Management, New York : Van Nstrand Reinhold, 1999. Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997. Spears MC & Marquardt NW, Food Service Organization: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.

GTN312/3-Food Microbiology This course will introduce students to the role of microorganism in food. Chronicle research in food microbiology, characteristics and behavior of microorganisms, water bone disease, microbial related food poisoning and toxicity will also discussed. Students will also be exposed to several aspects of food production by using the means of microorganism and food biotechnology. Statistics related to food quality control will also introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Jay, JM, Modern Food Mikrobiology, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 2001. Ray, B., Fundamental Food Mikrobiology, USA: CRC Press, 2003. Waittes, MJ and Mogan, NL, Industrial Microbiology, New York: Blackwell Science Inc., 2001. Marth, EH and Steele Sr, JL, Applied Dairy Microbiology, NewYork:Marcell Dekker Inc., 2001. Harrigan, W, Laboratory Methods in Food Microbiology, New York: Academic Press, 1998. Garbutt, JH, Essential of Food Microbiology, New York : Edward Arnold, 1997.

GTN314/2-Nutrition Anthropology Food heritage and definition of food diversity in different cultures including classification of food, belief, taboo, food symbolism, origin and food pattern evaluation including food availability pattern and food preparation will be the core of this course. This course will also discuss the factors that influence food choice and trends in food intake. Students will be taught on dietary habits of various ethics or community and its implication towards nutritional and health status. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bryant C.A., Dewalt K.M., Courtney A. and Schwantz J., The Cultural Feast-An Introduction to Food and Society, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2003. Kitler, Goyan P., Food and Culture, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2000. McMillan DE (editor), Anthropology & Food Policy: Human Dimensions of Food Policy in Africa & Latin America, Univ. of Georgia, 1991.

160

4. 5. 6.

Sinclair HM & Howat GR, World Nutrition and Nutrition Education, Paris, Oxford Univ. Press, 1980. Rita R.C., The Economic & Politics of Health, Chapel Hill, 2001. Gordon J, Direnzo, Human Social Behavior: Concepts and Principles of Sociology, Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1990.

GTP301/2-Psycholinguistics This is an advanced course in linguistics that discusses the psychological and neurobiological processes in the acquisition, understanding and the use of language. The topics covered are language processing and production, first and second language acquisition and bilingualism. This course also emphasizes on the application of this knowledge to the field of speech pathology. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Altmann, G. T. M., Psycholinguistics Critical Concepts in Psychology, London: Routledge, 2002. Field, J., Psycholinguistics A Resource Book for Students, London: Routledge, 2003. Steinberg, D. D., Hiroshi, N. & Aline, D. P., Psycholinguistics Language, Mind And World, Essex: Longman, 2001.

GTP302/2-Language Disorders This is a theoretical course on language disorders among children. It focuses on the developmental language disorders such as receptive language disorders and expressive language disorders. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of language disorders. In addition this course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with language disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Rhea, P., Language Disorders from Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001. Nelson, N. W., Childhood Language Disorders in Context: Infancy Through Adolescence, 2nd Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1998. Vinson, B. P., Language Disorders Across the Lifespan: An Introduction 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 2008.

GTP303/2- Neuropsychology This is a theoretical course which gives exposure to the fundamental aspects of neuropsychology in the fields of speech pathology. The topics covered are major brain structures, systems and their associated functions. It focuses, in general, on the brainbehaviours and brain-cognition relationships and their disorders.

161

This course also emphasises on the application of this knowledge to the management of speech pathology cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stirling, J., Introducing Neuropsychology, New York: Taylor& Francis, Inc., 2002. Rains, G. D., Principles of Human Neuropsychology, Montreal: McGraw-Hill, 2002. Balconi, M (ed), Neuropsychology of communication, New York: Springer, 2010

GTU302/3-Biostatistics This course will expose the students to basic biostatistics relevant to qualitative and quantitative data analysis in medical and health situations which include normal distribution, one and two samples case test, correlation, linear regression, analysis of variants, catagorized and numeric data analysis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Daly, J., Gliksman, J. and Kellehear A. and Gliksman, M. (1997) Public Health Researcher: A Methodological Guide. UK: Oxford University Press. Daniel, W.W. (1998). Biostatistics: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences, (7th Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998. Norman, G.R and Streiner, D.L, Norman, G.R. (2000). Biostatistics - The Bare Essentials (2nd Ed.). Ontario: B.C. Decker Inc.

GTU303/2-Research Methodology This course introduces students to important aspects of Health Science research methodology. It covers areas such as research typology, stages in research and issues related to the integration of Physical Health Science research and the Social Science research methods as a step towards introducing a more comprehensive and holistic problem solving approach. Other aspects covered include the basis for data analyses, critical evaluation and preparation of research proposal/protocal and how to prepare and present research reports. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R. (1999). Handbook for Research Methods in Health Science., Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman. Montgomery, D. (2000). Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.). NY: John Wiley and Sons. Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill Professionals.

162

GTP3 304/3-Speech Pathology Cli inic III In th his course, students are expected e to conduct c interv viewing sessi ions under super rvision and per rform related formal/ f informa al assessment of o patients. Th hey are also expec cted to practice building ra apport with patient, p especia ally in paedia atric cases. Depe ending on the supervisors judgment, j the e students may y be asked to o assist the thera apist and/or to perform the th herapy. The stu udents are also o required to pl lan therapy goals s, weekly ther rapy plan and d formulate th he prognosis prior p to discu ussion with super rvisors. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Smit, A.B B., Articulation n and Phonol logy Resource e, New York: : Thomson Delmar Le earning, 2003. Gordon-Br rannan, M., Clinical C Manag gement of Art ticulatory and d Phonologic Disorders, 3rd Ed., New York: Y Lippinco ott Williams & Wilkins, 2007 7. Gregory, H.H., H Campbell l, J. H., Gregor ry, C.B. & Hill l, D.G., Stutter ring Therapy: Rationale and a Procedure es, Boston: All lyn & Bacon In nc., 2003.

305/2-Counseling for Specia al Population GTP3 l course that exposes fundam mental aspects of counselling g in the fields This is a theoretical udiology and speech patho ology. It focu uses on the application a of f counselling of au metho odologies in the t manageme ent of individu uals with com mmunication di isorders. The topics s covered inc clude theories, , procedures, related issues s in counsellin ng and their applic cations in the fields f of audiol logy and speech pathology. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Luterman, D.M., Counse eling persons With W Communi ication Disorde ers and Their Families, 5th Ed., Austin n, TX: Pro-Ed., , 2008. Flasher, L. L V, & Fog gel, P. T, Counseling C Sk kills for Spee ech-Language Pathologis st and Audiolog gist, Albany: Thompson T Delm mar Learning, 2004. 2 Nelson-Jon nes, R., Introdu uction to Coun nseling Skills, 3rd Ed., London n: Sage Publication n Ltd., 2000.

GTP3 306/3-Voice and Resonance e Disorders This is a theoretica al course on disorders d of voice and reson nance. The stu udy of voice ders focuses on o several type es of voice dis sorders such as a organic and neurological disord voice e disorders, and d alaryngeal sp peech. The stu udy of resonanc ce disorders em mphasises on hyper rnasality and hyponasality are introduce ed. The topics s covered are e definitions, etiolo ogies and char racteristics of each type of voice v disorder rs and resonan nce disorders. This course also discusses the me ethods of assessment and pr rinciples of interventions in aging individua als with voice disorders d and resonance r disor rders. mana

163

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stemple, J. C., Glaze, L. E., & Klaben, B. G., Clinical Voice Pathology: Theory and Management, 3rd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000. Kent, R. D., & Ball, M. J., Voice Quality Measurement, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001. Boone, D. R., McFarlane, S. C. & Von Berg, S. L., The Voice and Voice Therapy, 8th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.

GTP307/3- Acquired Communication Disorders This is a theoretical course on acquired communication disorders. The study of acquired communication disorders focuses on acquired language disorders such as aphasia, dementia, right hemisphere syndrome and traumatic brain injury and motor speech disorders such as apraxia and dysarthria. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of acquired communication disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with acquired communication disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Freed, D. B., Motor Speech Disorders Diagnosis and Treatment, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000. Brookshire, R. H., Introduction to Neurogenic Communication Disorders, 7th Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2003 Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook On Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language Disorders, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2007.

GTP308/4-Speech Pathology Clinic IV In this course, the student are required to manage patients with speech disorders and hearing impairment under supervision Students will have to perform interviewing session related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly therapy plan and conduct therapy session on their own. Each decision made by students will be analysed critically during discussion with the supervisor. The student will be trained to make the diagnosis and prognosis for each case that they handle. Therefore, students must show adequate knowledge and critical thought during the discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Meyer, S. M., Survival Guide for the Beginning Speech-Language Clinician, 2nd Ed., London: Pro-Ed Inc., 2004. Rhea, P., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001. Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001.

164

GTP309/3 - Hearing Impairment This is a theoretical course on hearing impairment and aural rehabilitation. The study of aural rehabilitation focuses mainly on paediatrics aural habilitation with an additional exposure on adults aural rehabilitation. The topics covered are hearing impairment and its effects on communication, audiological management and educational issues. This course emphasises on the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with hearing impairment. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001. Johnson, C. E. & Danhauer, J. C., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural Rehabilitation, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999. Northern, J. C. & Davis, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.

GTP 310/2 - Speech Pathology Clinical Placement In this course, the students are required to help in handling various cases of paediatric and adult cases of speech and language disorders, hearing impairment, acquired neurogenic disorders, and voice and resonance disorders under selected supervisor from outside of the university. Depending on the supervisors judgment, the student may be asked to assist the clinician during the session. The students will be asked to conduct the interviewing session and perform related formal/ informal assessment of the patient and also to plan for the goals and therapies. Ethics and related professional issues will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldstein, B., Cultural and Linguistic Diversity Resource Guide for SpeechLanguage Pathologists, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2000. Hedge, M. N., Treatment Protocols for Language Disorders in Children, Plural Publishing, Incorporated, 2005. Hedge,M. N., Clinical Methods and Practicum in Speech-Language Pathology, 5th Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2009.

GTS301/3-Sports Nutrition This course exposes students to the methods of identifying the nutritional requirements of the sports person in various sporting disciplines. Nutrional requirements of various sports events and additional ergogenic aids to enhance sports performance will also be discussed.

165

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I., Katch, V.L., Sports and Exercise Nutrition, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Wildman R.E.C. and Miller B.S., Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth, 2004. Eberle S.G., Endurance Sports Nutrition, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007.

GTS302/2-Motor Learning This course introduces the students to learning theories and perception, and how these impact on motor learning, including the acquisition of motor skills, retention and forgetting of information. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Magill, R. A., Motor Learning. Concepts and Applications, Columbus, OH: McGraw-Hill, 2004. Schmidt, R. and Lee, T. Motor Control and Learning: A Behavioral Emphasis, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Schmidt, R. and Wrisberg, C., Motor Learning and Performance, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2004.

GTS303/3-Sports Injuries and Rehabilitation This course will introduce the students to the concepts of trauma and injuries in sports; epidemiology of sport injuries and mechanism of injuries due to sport activities. Different types of sport injuries on specific body region will be discussed. Students will also learn about the principles of rehabilitation process including the use of equipments for the treatment and therapies of particular sport injuries. Students will be exposed on the post injury management related to rehabilitation program and learn how to implement the basic techniques for injury prevention in sports. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Robert S. Gotlin, (Ed.). Sports Injuries Guidebook. Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2008. Freddie H. Fu, Stone & David A. Stone (eds). Sports Injuries: Mechanisms, prevention and treatment, 2nd Ed.. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. 2001. Selvanetti, A., Giombini, A., Puddu, G. (eds). Rehabilitation of Sports Injuries. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. New York. 2001

3.

166

GTS304/3-Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology This course introduces the anatomy of the skeletal-muscle and neuro-muscular structure, understand the functions and limitations of the systems, comprehend the types and causes of movement in sports and to analyse body motion. The course will focus on the development techniques of human motion analysis from the aspect of structure and function as well as the applied mechanical principles involved in human movement. Examples from joint movements and application of sports skills will be used for the analyses. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hamilton N., Welmar W. and Luttgens K., Kinesiology: Scientific basis for human motion, 11th Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008 Bartlett R., Introduction to Sports Biomechanics: Analysing human movement patterns, 2nd Ed., London: Taylor & Francis, 2007. Hall S.J., Basic Biomechanics, 5th Ed., Boston, Mass.: McGraw-Hill, 2007.

GTS305/2-Applied Sports Physiology The course will discuss the environmental aspects of sports performance.The problems faced during exercise in a hot and humid environment, altitude training, circadian rhythm and jet lag will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Reilly T. and Waterhouse J., Sport, Exercise and Environmental Physiology, Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005. Tipton C.M. (Eds) Sawka M.N., Tate C.A. and Terjung R.L. (Eds), ACSM's Advanced Exercise Physiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. Powers S.K. and Howley E.T., Exercise Physiology Theory and Application to Fitness and Performance, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2001.

3.

GTS306/3-Coaching Science and Performance Analysis This course will expose the students to information of sport sciences (anatomy, physiology, psychology, biomechanics, and skill acquisition) which are important for coaches. It also emphasis on the management, planning and interpersonal skills required of the modern coach. The course also covers advanced coaching means and methods, theory and practical of planning, periodisation, forecasting and target setting in order to analyse sport performance.

167

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Martens R., Successful Coaching, 3rd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2004. Pyke F.S., Australia Sports Commission, Better Coaching: Advance Coachs Manual, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001. MacMorris T. and Hale T. Coaching Science: Theory Into Practice. John Wiley & Sons, 2006. Hughes M., Notational Analysis of Sport: Systems for Better Coaching and Performance in Sport, London: Routledge, 2004.

GTS307/3-Lifespan, Growth and Development This course will expose the students to issues related to physical growth and development with regards to physical activity. After the introduction of general concepts, discussion of the maturation process, morphological and functional changes in relation to exercise and training will be conducted. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thies K.M. and Travers J.F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan, 2nd Ed., Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009. Malina, R. M., Bar-Or, O., Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical Activity, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001. Jurimae, T. and Hills, A. P., Body Composition Assessment in Children and Adolescents, Karger, 2001.

GTU302/3-Biostatistics This course will expose the students to basic biostatistics relevant to qualitative and quantitative data analysis in medical and health situations which include normal distribution, one and two samples case test, correlation, linear regression, analysis of variants, catagorised and numeric data analysis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Daniel W.W., Biostatistics: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998. Norman, G.R and Streiner, D.L, Norman, G.R., Biostatistics - The Bare Essentials, 2nd Ed., B.C. Decker Inc., 2000. Daly J, Gliksman, M., Kellehear A., Public Health Researcher; A Methodological Guide, Oxford University Press, 1997.

168

GTU303/2-Research Methodology This course introduces students to important aspects of Health Science research methodology. It covers research typology, stages in research and issues related to the integration of Physical Health Science research and the Social Science research methods as a step towards introducing a more comprehensive and holistic problem solving approach. Other aspects covered include the basis for data analyses, critical evaluation and preparation of research proposal/protocal and how to prepare and present research reports. List of text/reference books: 1. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R., Handbook for Research Methods in Health Sciences, Addison Wesley, Longman Australia, 1999. Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill Professionals, 1999. Montgomery, D.C Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2000.

2. 3.

GTX302/2Radiation Protection and Safety I This course will discuss important aspects of radiation protection and safety including basic principles in radiation protection, biological effects of radiation, personal dosimetry, radiation detection, and regulations related to the use of radiation in Malaysia. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ismail, B. and Mohd. Yusof, M.A., Managing Radiation Safety: Guide for Radiation Protection Officers, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill, 2007. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H. and Sheriff S.B., Walter and Millers Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002. Martin, A. and Harbison, S.A., An Introduction to Radiation Protection, 5th Ed., A Hodder Arnold Publication, 2006.

GTX307/3Radiation Protection and Safety II This course concentrates on practical radiation protection and safety in the field of nuclear medicine, diagnostic radiology and radiotherapy. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. McGinley P.H., Shielding Techniques for Radiation Oncology Facilities, 2nd Ed., Medical Physics Publishing, 2002. Statkiewicz sherer, M.A., Visconti, P.J. and Ritenour, E.R., Radiation Protection in Medical Radiography, 5th Ed., Mosby, 2006.

169

3.

Lombardi, M.H., Radiation Protection in Nuclear Medicine, 2nd Ed., CRC, 2006.

GTX314/2Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry This course will focus on the properties of ionising radiation including the interaction of radiation with matter. Basic theories of ionising radiation dosimetry in diagnostic radiology and radiotherapy will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003.

GTX316/3Diagnostic Radiology Imaging This course will focus on the methods of imaging other than conventional ways including mammography, fluoroscopy, digital radiology and digital subtraction angiography (DSA). It also includes quality assurance programmes, regulations on the use of radiation equipment and practical radiation protection. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farrs Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier, 2008. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.

GTX317/3Nuclear Medicine Imaging This course will discuss topics in radiopharmacy, radiation detection methods and introduction to imaging equipment including the gamma camera. The principles of using radioactive materials in the laboratory and also health physics will be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2004. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002.

170

3.

Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Elsevier, 2003.

GTX319/4Imaging Techniques I This course will provide the opportunity to the students to carry out experiments and clinical training in the hospital related to diagnostic radiology and nuclear medicine. The students will learn various imaging procedures using X-ray machine, dose calibrator and gamma camera. Clinical dosimetry and QA will be introduced.. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006. Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Textbook of Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy, 7th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 2010. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Springer, 2005.

GTX320/3Principles of Radiotherapy This course introduces basic principles of photon beam therapy and electron beam therapy which include radiation physics and dosimetry in radiotherapy. Students will learn techniques to calculate monitor unit for various clinical applications. Students will also be exposed to the standard methods used to do calibration for photon beam and electron beam generated by linear accelerator. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., Wiley-Liss, 2004. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.

171

6.4. Core Courses Level 400

172

GTA401/6-Research Project In this course, the students are required to conduct and complete a research project in audiology over two semesters. The aim of this research project is to expose the students to research methodology and research problem solving methods. The results of the research are presented in the last semester of the program. List of text/reference books: References whichever suitable with research title. GTA402/3-Noise and Hearing This course discusses noise and its effects on health and hearing, types of noise, noise levels measurement, other measurement devices, and Malaysias Noise Control Act. Hearing conservation programme, hearing protection devices, noise-induced hearing loss and record keeping for noise exposed population will be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hinchcliffe, R., & Luxon, L. M., Noise and Hearing, London: Whurr, 2001. Luxon, L., & Prasher, D., Noise and its Effects, London: Whurr, 2007. Lipscomb, D. M., Hearing Conservation in Industry, Schools and the Military, 1st ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1995.

GTA403/5-Audiology Clinic III In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical sessions either in or off campus during Year 3 long semester break and first semester of Year 4. They are expected to improve their clinical skills such as client history, taking a conduct audiological assessment (subjective and objective tests), prescribe, evaluate and assess hearing aids, take ear-impression, write refer and reply letters to other professionals whenever necessary. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or management prior to every clinical session, to explain results and counsel clients at the end of each clinical session. Student clinicians are expected to be involved actively and act competently in all aspects while under supervision and lesser assistant from supervisor. List of text/reference books: 1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.

173

2.

Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc. Hall, 1996. J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1998.

GTA404/2- Ethics and Law for Health Professionals The aim of this course is to expose students to current issues in audiology field. Students are required to present or to conduct forum on selected audiological topics. This course will also expose the students to the professional code of ethics in Audiology and Speech based on the American Speech and Hearing Association (ASHA). Local issues are also discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. Irwin, D. L., Pannbacker; M., Powell, T. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for Speech-Language Pathologists and Audiologists, An Illustrative Caseboo, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2007. Lubinski, R. & Frattali, C., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, San Diego : Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.

2.

GTA405/5- Audiology Clinic IV In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical session. They are expected to improve their clinical skills such as clients history taking, to conduct audiological assessment (subjective and objective tesst), to prescribe, evaluate and validate hearing aids, to take ear-impression, to write referral letters, and audiological reports to other professionals whenever necessary and competently while under supervision. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or management prior to every clinical session and to explain results and counsel clients at the end of each clinical session. Student clinicians are expected to be involved competently in every aspect under supervision and with least assistance from the supervisor. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1996. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1998.

3.

174

GTB404/3-Toxicology This course is an introduction to toxicology. Qualitative and quantitative aspects of toxicology including dose, dose response, tissue response to toxic agents, excretion of toxic agents and reactions to toxic compounds are addressed. In addition, selected topics such as the toxicity of solvents, food additives, poisons inclusive of plant poisons and pesticides, detergents and metallic poisons, the measurement of toxic level, in vitro and in vivo tests, toxicokinetics, toxicity of target organs, carcinogens, mutagen, teratogens, mechanism of toxicity, laboratory tests inclusive of antidote, treatment and management of toxicity will be taught. Students will be introduced to topics related to chemical warfare. The students will also be given a training in techniques and principles used in the laboratory such as acute and chronic toxicity tests, carcinogenicity testing, detection of trace elements, isolating and testing of compounds and uses of instruments such as spectroscopy and chromatography. Students will also be exposed to actual working environment through short attachments at the Pharmacology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences and Toxicology Laboratory, School of Health Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dart, R.C. (2003). Medical Toxicology, (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Hodgson. E. (2004). A Texbook of Modern Toxicology, (3rd. Ed.). NY: John Wiley and Sons. Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2003). Casarett & Doulls Essential of Toxicology (1st Ed.). USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc. Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2008). Casarett & Doulls Toxicology the basic science of Poison, (7th Ed.). USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc.

GTB407/4-Industrial Training Industrial training is a core activity in the laboratory/clinical/industry aspects of the programme. The students are expected to participate in actual service situation in health based organizations. They will be exposed to the practical aspect of administration, analysis and evaluation of scientific results related to diseases, conditions of patients and/or products related with the health industry. They will be trained in the skills of correlating the theoretical aspects of laboratory science to that of clinical observations that had been previously taught in the course. Students need to be able to analyse clinical specimens, be involved with the quality control programmes and laboratory administration which includes the ability to solve problems related to clinical services and related industries. In brief, this training is designed to equip students with the latest knowledge/skills required in the professional service and administration of the biomedical laboratory and related industries.

175

List of text/reference books: Relevant text books and peer-reviewed journals related to the field of interest. GTB408/9-Biomedical Practicum This is a core course in the training of clinical laboratory scientists involved in the providing of services to patients in hospitals and other related organizations. The students will be given sufficient practical exposures and to experience the handling and analysis of specimens, interpretation of the results obtained from patients suspected of having various conditions and diseases. They will be able to translate theoretical knowledge on laboratory sciences and the clinical sciences learned in an applied manner so that they can then handle or analyse cases in the laboratory. The students are required to identify factors that may cause problems to the laboratory services, analysis of clinical specimens, implementation of quality control programmes and the handling of the problems related to clinical laboratory services, irrespective of where they are emplaced or posted. This is done in order to improve the students skills in running and managing the laboratory effectively and professionally. List of text/reference books: Any text books relevant to the field of clinical/industrial attachment chosen by the students including those journals in their respective fields of speciality. GTB409/4-Research Project The students are required to carry out a research project in related fields in order to broaden their knowledge and skills in critical analysis and to acquire skills in scientific aspects for the testing of hypotheses in health science topics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R.(1999). Handbook for Research Methods in Health Sciences. Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman. Montgomery, D.C (2000).Design and Analysis of Experiments, (5th Ed.) NY: John Wiley and Sons. Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill Professionals Any test books/journals relevant to the fields or topics of research chosen by the students.

176

GTB410/2-Laboratory Management Quality assurance has become an essential part of hospital services. It is describes as systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that a product or service will satisfy given needs. The course introduces students to the concept of total quality management (TQM) in clinical diagnostic laboratory. TQM in clinical diagnostic laboratory emphasised the deployment of quality assurance principles and practice through the development and implementation of quality assurance plans and phases. Students will also learn the quality systems, ISO 9001, MS ISO 15189 and MS ISO/IEC 17025, in relation to the management of clinical diagnostic laboratory. Teaching and learning methods will be in form of lectures, seminars and practical attachment in various clinical diagnostic laboratories. Coursework assessment includes the evaluation of written assignment, written test and seminar presentations. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Carson, P. A. & Dent. N.J. (2007). Good clinical, laboratory and manufacturing practices: techniques for the QA professional. Cambridge: RSC Publication. Cooper G. & Gillions T. (2007). Producing Reliable Test Results in the Medical Laboratory. Irvin, CA: Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc Department of Standards Malaysia. (2005). MS ISO/IEC 17025:2005. General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories. Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia. Department of Standards Malaysia. (2008). MS ISO 15189:2007. Medical laboratories Particular requirements for quality and competence. Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia. International Standards Organization. (2008). ISO 9001:2008. Quality management systems Requirement (4th Ed.). ISO. Singer D. C., Stefan R. & and Staden J (2005). Laboratory Auditing for Quality and regulatory Compliance. NY: Taylor & Francis Group.

4.

5. 6.

GTD406/3-Outpatient Dietetic Practicum II This course is a continuation of Outpatient Dietetic Internship I. The purpose of this internship is to develop students' self confidence in planning the diet and to handle diet counselling session under supervision. They will be attached to specialist clinics including the pediatric, renal and surgical clinics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Bauer K, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development, Wadsworth, 2002. Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007

177

GTD407/3-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II This course is a continuation of Dietetic Practicum in the Ward I. The purpose of this course is to enhance students dietetic skills in giving medical nutrition therapy to patients in hospital wards. Students will be attached to selected wards such as pediatric, general, surgical and medical wards under the supervision of respective dietitians. Students are required to give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite of completion of this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Antia AP, Antia FP, Abraham P, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition, 4th Ed., Oxford University Press, 1998. Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007 Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.

GTD408/3-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II This course is a continuation of Dietetic Internship Special Unit I. The purpose of this course is to expand students' knowledge in giving appropriate medical nutrition therapy in specific fields such as pediatric, surgery, trauma, medical, renal, oncology, nutritional support and critical care. Intensive training will be provided by the respective dietitians. Students are required to give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite to the completion of this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Werbach MR, Jeffrey Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press, 2000. Mahan K. et al. Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007 Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.

GTF400/2-Forensic Medicine This course will introduce various kinds of death and its signs. It provides fundamental knowledge on the various chemical transformations taking place after death, which form the basis for the estimation of time of death. It provides fundamental knowledge on postmortem study, pattern and types of injuries. It includes theoretical and practical aspects of victims dying of unknown causes, killing, suicide, blunt/sharp force injuries, firearm and explosive injuries, asphyxia, drowning, burns, and electricals shocks. Students will witness autopsy demonstrations and be familiar with the management of a mortuary, embalming and autopsy report writing.

178

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Jurgen Ludwiig, Handbook of Autopsy Practice, 3rd Ed., Human Press, 2002. Maio, V.J.M, Dominic Dimaio and Dominic J. Dimaio, Forensic Pathology, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2001. Robinson, P.S., Principles of Forensic Medicine, Oxford Press, Hong Kong, 1996. Jason Payne-James, Anthony Busuttil and William Smock, Forensic Medicine: Clinical and Pathological Aspects, Greenwich Medical Media, 2003. Saukko, Pekka, Knights Forensic Pathology, Arnold, 2004.

GTF402/4-Ballistics and Chemistry of Explosives This course will introduce the concept of explosion and various explosives encountered at crime scenes, the different types of chemicals used for manufacturing explosives, chemistry of explosion, chemical residues of explosion, and chemical and instrumental methods for detecting chemical residues. This course also incorporates the science of ballistics and knowledge required for the investigation of cases involving firearms including propellant chemistry, physical behaviour of projectiles, range of firing, powder patterns left by propellant chemicals and crime scene reconstruction in shooting cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Vincent J. M. Di Maio, Gunshot Wounds: Practical Aspects of Fire Arms, Ballistics, and Forensic Techniques, 2 nd Ed., CRC Press, 2002. Jonas A.Zukas, William, P.Walters, Explosive Effects and Applications, Springer, 2002. Mike Pickett, Explosives Identification Guide, Delmer Publishers, 1998. Donald E. Carlucci and Sidney S. Jacobson, Ballistics - Theory and Design of Guns and Ammunition, CRC Press, 2007. Tom Warlow, Firearms, the Law, and Forensic Ballistics, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2005.

GTF406/6- Research Projects In this course, the students will have to do a research project in any related field to increase their skills in the scientific aspects and scientific investigation to test a particular hypothesis. The versatility of choosing projects in a wide range of topics impresses upon the students the importance of using a systematic research approaches and thought process in solving problems and to face challenges. List of text/reference books: Journal and other references based on areas of research being choosen.

179

GTF407/8-Forensic Practicum This course will be conducted at the Royal Malaysian Police College and the Royal Malaysian Police Forensic Laboratory in Cheras, Selangor. It is assisted by forensic experts from the Department of Chemistry, Petaling Jaya. This course will provide hands on training on crime scene management and forensic examination by way of mock crime scenes and moot court. The students will also be exposed to various chemical and instrumental investigative techniques and have practical training in fingerprints, ballistics, and clandestine laboratory investigation. The students will also visit real crime scenes and be appraised of the various procedures followed in the search and collection of evidence materials. This course provides fundamental knowledge on Malaysian Legal System and police administration in processing of evidence materials at Department of Chemistry. This course also provides detailed knowledge on the preparation of reports and presentation of evidence in courts. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Jami J. St. Clair, Crime Laboratory Management, Academic Press, 2003. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science: An Introduction to Scientific and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2005. Donnell R. Christian, Forensic Investigation of Clandestine Laboratories, CRC Press, 2004. Henry C. Lee and R. E. Gaensslen, Advances in Fingerprint Technology, CRCm Press, 2001. John Horswell, Practice of Crime Scene Investigation, Taylor & Francis, 2004. Max H. Houck, Mute Witnesses: Trace Evidence Analysis, Academic Press, 2001. Stuart H. James, Paul Erwin Kish, T. Paulette Sutton, Principles of Bloodstain Analysis : Theory and Practice, CRC Press, 2005. Barry A.J. Fisher, Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation, 7th Ed. CRC Press, 2004. Hal Sherman and Nicholas Petraco, Illustrated Guide to Crime Scene Investigation, CRC Press 2005.

GTF408/2-Examination of Questioned Documents This course will be conducted by experience document examiners from The Department of Chemistry, Petaling Jaya and will be conducted at Forensic Laboratory,at the Department of Chemistry. It will introduce techniques of forensic documents examination. The content of this course include basic techniques for examination of questioned documents and case report preparation. The students will be trained to use the latest instrumentation be exposed to laboratory experience. Practical training will also be provided including identification of type writting, hand writting, signature, ammendments, ink and paper analysis, printing process and the originality of official documents.

180

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ellen, D. The Scientific Examination of Documents-Methods and Techniques, 2nd Ed., Taylor and Francis, 1997. Roy, A. H. and Headrick, A. M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and Fundamentals, CRC Press LLC, 1999. Koppenhaven, K.M. Forensic Document Examination: Principles and Practices, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2007 Kelly, J.S. and Lindblom, B.J. Scientific Examination of Questioned Documents, Taylor & Francis, 2006. Hober, H.I, and Headrick A.M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and Fundamentals, Taylor and Francis, 2006.

GTJ405/5-Medical Nursing Practicum This structured medical nursing practicum is designed to give the student exposure and clinical experience including application of Nursing Foundation, Medical Nursing, Gerontological Nursing; and Mental Health and Psychiatry Nursing. Students will integrate this knowledge utilising the holistic nursing care approach and using the nursing process in caring for various age groups. This course will provide opportunities to student in performing ward management and client-family health teaching. Emphasis will be given to the practice of safe, competent nursing and professionalism in the hospital and community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Carpenito-Moyet, L.J., Nursing Diagnosis:Application to Clinical Practice, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Smith, S.F., Martin, B., & Duell, D.J., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basics to Advanced Skills, 6th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003. Smeltzer, S.C., & Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S., Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003.

GTJ406/4-Surgical Nursing Practicum This structured surgical nursing practicum is designed to give the students exposure and clinical experience including application of Nursing Foundation, Surgical Nursing, Gerontological Nursing; and Mental Health and Psychiatry Nursing. The students will integrate this knowledge by utilising the holistic nursing care approach and using the nursing process in caring for various age groups. This course will provide opportunities to student in performing ward management and client-family health teaching. Emphasis will be given to the practice of safe, competent nursing and professionalism in the hospital and community.

181

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hunt, R., Community-Based Nursing, 2nd Ed., Lippincott William Wilkins, 2001. Smeltzer, S.C., & Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S., Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Murray, R.B. & Zentner, J.P., Health Promotion Strategies Through the Life Span, 7th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2001.

GTJ407/4-Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum This structured nursing practicum is designed to give the student the exposure and clinical experience in community nursing. This is an application course for Critical Care Nursing, Primary, Family and Community Health Care. The students will integrate their knowledge while providing holistic nursing care to individual of various age groups. It also will provide the students with the opportunity to solve problems e.g. critical care nursing and give client-family health teaching. The students are also required to practice in the community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hunt, R., Community-Based Nursing, 2nd Ed., Lippincott William Wilkins, 2001. Smeltzer, S.C., & Bare, B.G, Suddarth , D.S., Brunner and Suddarths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Murray, R.B. & Zentner, J.P., Health Promotion Strategies Through the Life Span, 7th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2001.

GTJ408/4-Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum This structured nursing practicum is designed to expose the students to clinical experiences in the discipline of maternal, child and women health. This is an application course of Maternal, Neonate, Child, and Gynecological Nursing and Primary, Family and Community Health Care. Students will integrate this knowledge in providing holistic nursing care using the nursing process and practice the related nursing skills safely and efficiently. Opportunities will be given to students in performing client-family health teaching. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gabbe, S.G., Niebyl, J.R. & Simpson, J.L., Obstetrics: Normal and Problem Pregnancies, 4th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2000. Schulte, E., Price, D.L., Gwrin, J.F., Thompson's Pediatric Nursing: An Introductory Text, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2002. Pillitteri, A., Maternal and Child Health Nursing: Care of the Childbearing and Childrearing Family, 4th Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2002.

182

GTK401/4-Environmental & Occupational Law This course will be divided into two parts. In the first part, current laws and enforcement in Malaysia and international regarding environmental protection will be introduced. Problems and issues in law enforcement and the importance of law and documentation and their implications are discussed. The second part will explore laws and regulations in Malaysia in shielding workers safety and health. Course content is aligned with Second Module for Occupational, Safety & Health Officer Course by Department of Occupational, Safety & Health Malaysia (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) & Peraturan-Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. September 2003. ILBS. Akta Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan & Perintah-Perintah. 2005. International Law Book Services (ILBS). Richard J. Lazarus, The Making of Environmental Law, University of Chicago Press. 2004. Robert H. Abraham et al., Environmental Law & Policy : Nature, Law and Society. Aspen Publishers, 2004. NIOSH, Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan & Kesihatan, Modul II. Institut Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara, Malaysia, 2003.

3. 4. 5.

GTK402/3-Environmental Management In this course, the students will be introduced to various aspects in environmantal management including system ISO 14001 which are applied internationally. The importance of the standard and will be trained to prepare documentation and run an internal audit in will discussed. The needs and protocol to conduct Environmental Impact Assessment, Social Impact Assessment, modelling and environmantal integrated management will be highlighted. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Paul N. Cheremisinoff & Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff, Professional Environmental Auditors Handbook. William Andrew, 1993. M.Radojevic & V. Bashkin, Practical Environmental Analysis. Royal Society of Chemistry, 1999. G.Tylor Miller, Environmental Science, 8E Working With The Earth, Thompson Learning Science, 2001. Alan Schoffman & Allan M. Tordini, ISO 14001 : A Practical Approach. An American Chemical Society Publication, 2003. Frank B. Friedman, Practical Guide To Environmental Management, 9th Ed.. Environmental Law Institute, 2003.

183

GTK403/3-Safety and Occupational Health Management This course will expose students to management systems in Environmental & Occupational, Safety & Health (OSH) that are being practiced in Malaysia such as OSHAS 18001, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722. The aim of this course is to generate attitude awareness and self-regulate among workers and employee towards healthy and safe working environment. This course will cover documentation, training, performance evaluation and audit method. The course content is aligned with First Module for Occupational, Safety & Health Officer Course by Department of Occupational, Safety & Health Malaysia (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. ILO-OSH, Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems, 2001. Ismail Bahari, Pengaturan Sendiri Dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan. Kuala Lumpur, McGraw Hill Education, 2002. NIOSH, Pengurusan Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan. Manual Kursus Pegawai Keselamatan & Kesihatan, Modul 1, 2003.

GTK404/8-Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum Through USM-Industry collaborative programme, students will be placed for 4 months in selected government and private organisation with post of full time Safety & Health Officer or Environmental Officer. The officers-in charge will guide the students in troubleshooting safety & health issues (OSH) regarding occupational sorroundings in Malaysia. Students will be exposed practically on OSH or working environment at workplace. This oppourtunity is an advantage for the students to practice theory and to be trained as an OSH Officer from various aspects such as promotion, prevention, intervention, enforcement and etc. Students are able to enhance their skills and prepare themselves to real workplace situation. List of text/reference books: References whichever suitable with research title. GTK405/8-Research Project In this course, the students are required to conduct and complete a research project in Environmental & Occupational Health over one full academic session. The objective of this reserach project is to enhance knowledge and skill in reserach methodology and research problem solving regarding Environmental & Occupational Health. Students are encouraged to visit industrial plant and choose a problem in such organisation as a research question and assist the particular organisation to solve the problem through scientific approach. The result of research have to be presented in the scientific writing and final year presentation.

184

List of text/reference books: References whichever suitable with research title. GTN401/3-Food Service and Industry Practicum This course will stress on food service handling (in hospitals, institutions, industry and restaurants) and the relationship between quantitative food manufacturing with different menus, equipments, service staff, time of serving, kitchen sanitation, food preparation and quality assurance. The main focus is on the practical sessions at hospitals, institutions, industries and major restaurants. Lectures and briefing sessions will be given on the first week or before the commencement of internship. The students will undergo internship service for a period of 4 weeks in recognised premises. During internship attachments, the students are required to observe the utilisation of equipments, services and food management under supervision. List of text/reference books: 1 2 3 Knight JBL & Korschevar LH., Quantity of Food Production, Planning and Management, 3rd Ed., New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1999. Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997. Spears MC & Marquardt NW., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.

GTN403/6-Research Project in Nutrition In this course, the students are required to execute research in related field to increase knowledge and experience in critical analysis. The students are guided to obtain skills in scientific aspects to test certain hypothesis especially those related to health sciences field. Students are expected to produce a thesis at the end of the course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Eunsook T., Introduction to Nutrition and Health Research, Boston: Kluver Academic Publication, 2001 Heppner P.P, Writing and Publishing Your Thesis, Dissertation, and Research: a Guide for Students in the Helping Professions, Belmont: Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2004

GTN405/3-Current Issues in Nutrition This course provides an opportunity to students to discuss contemporary issues related to Malaysian nutrition intake. Controversial issues such as new form of conquering by the introduction of fast food, introduction of processed foods from other countries/continents and its impact on Malaysian food intake quality will be discussed.

185

Other topics include therapeutic and nutraceutical food consumption, fad diet, association of food with cancer disease and obesity will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Wardlaw, GM and Wardlaw G, Contemporary Nutrition: Issues and Insight with Foodworks, New York: McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Maths, 2000. Nestle, M, Food Politics: How the Food Industry Influences Nutrition and Health, California: University of California Press, 2003. Brownell, KD and Horgen, KB, Food Fight: The Inside Story of Food Industry, Americas Obesity Crisis, and What We Can Do About It, New York: McGraw Hill, 2003. Schlosser, E, Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal, New York: Harper Collins, 2002. De Graff J, Wann, D, Naylor, TH, Horsey, D, and Simon, S, Affluenza: The All Consumming Epidemic, New York: Berrett-Koehler Publisher, 2002.

4. 5.

GTN407/3-Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar This course requires students to perform library search and to read additional materials in the field of dietetics and nutrition. They are also required to do a literature review to explore the nutrition discipline. Students are guided with research process in terms of statement of the problem, literature review, experimental design, hypothesis, analysis, interpretation and presentation of data, writing, discussing, concluding and giving of proper recommendation in the writing of thesis and scientific articles. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Wardlaw GMM, Contemporary Nutrition, Issues and Insights, 5th Ed., Boston : McGrawHill, 2002. Nassabaum M, Adolescent Nutrition and eating Disorders, Elsevier Science, 1998. Jaffe, MS, Hobbs J, Holthausen B, Geriatric Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1998.

GTP 401/2 - Augmentative and Alternative Communication This course provides knowledge on the augmentative and alternative communication (ACC) as a communication method for those who cannot communicate verbally. The topics are types, methods and features of ACC. In addition, assessment and intervention principles of ACC will also be discussed in this course.

186

List of text/reference book: 1. Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Management of Severe Communication Disorders in Children and Adults, Baltimore: Brookes Publishers, 1998. Tetzchner, S. V. & Martinsen, H., Introduction to Augmentative and Alternative Communication, London: Whurr Publishers, 2000. Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Supporting Children and Adults With Complex Communication Needs. Baltimore: Paul H. Brooked Pub, 2006.

2. 3.

GTP402/6- Research Project This is a one-term course that requires students to complete a research project under supervision. Research topics may be in the field of speech pathology or other related fields such as linguistics, psychology, special education or audiology. At the end of the term, students are required to present their final outcomes and produce a complete thesis to be assessed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Silverman, F. H., Research Design and Evaluation in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, 4th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1998. Kuzma, J. W. & Bohnenblust, S. E., Basic Statistics for the Health Sciences, 5th Ed., Mountain View: Mayfield Pub., 2005. Ruscello, D. M., Tests and Measurements in Speech-Language Pathology, Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.

GTP 403/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic V In this course, the students must manage referred patients and conduct cases on their own under supervision. They have to perform all the assessment nessessary to evaluate the patients condition and ability, analyse and interprete the data collected and then plan for goals and weekly therapy. Student are also required to give counselling to the patient, where needed. At this stage, students will be exposed to the speech diagnostic tools and will be allowed to use it on their own. The students must show an adequate knowledge and critical thought during discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Boone, M. & Von Berg, The Voice and Voice Therapy, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2005. McHenry, W. & McHenry, J., What Therapists Say and Why They Say It: Effective Therapeutic Responses and Techniques, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2007. Hedge, M. N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language Disorder. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.

187

GTP 404/2 Swallowing Problems This is a theoretical course on swallowing problems. This course focuses on swallowing disorders and feeding difficulties. The topics are definitions, etiologies and characteristics of swallowing problems. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of intervention in managing individuals with swallowing problems . List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Carrau, R. L., & Murry, T. Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders. San Diego. Singular Publishing Group, 2006 Aevedson, J. C., & Brodsky, L. Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego.: Singular Publishing Group, 2002 Logemann, J. (1998). Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders 2nd Ed., Texas: Pro-ed, 1998

GTP406/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic VI In this course, the students must manage referred patient and conduct the case on their own, especially for acquired neurogenic and dysphagia cases while under supervision. Students will have to perform the interviewing session, related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly therapy, plan and conduct the therapy session on their own. The students are also required to give counselling to the patient, where needed. The student must be able to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Corbin-Lewis, K., Liss, J. M. & Sciortino, K., Clinical Anatomy and Physiology of the Swallow Mechanism, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2005. Leonard, R. & Kendall, K., Dysphagia Assessment and Treatment Planning: A Team Approach, 2nd Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2007. Irwin D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, P. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for Speech-Language Pathologist and Audiologist. An Illustrative Casebook, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2007.

GTP 407/2 Learning Disabilities This course focuses on the learning disabilities and education for children with communication disorders. The topics include theories and processes of learning, etiologies and characteristics of learning disabilities. this course also emphasises on the educational issues that are related to children with communication disorders and learning disabilities.

188

List of text/reference books: 1. Harwell, J.M., jackson R. W., The Complete Learning Disabilities Handbook: Ready-To-Use Strategies and Activities for Teaching Students with Learning Disabilities (Jossey-Bass teacher). California: Jossey-Bass Publisher, 2008. Lerner, J. W. Learning Disabilities Theories, Diagnosis, and Teaching Strategies. 10th Ed.,, Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2005 Fletcher, M., Lyon, G. R., Fuchs, L. S. & Barnes, M.A., Learning Disabilities: From Identification to Intervention. New York: The Guilford Press, 2006

2. 3.

GTP401/2-Augmentative and Alternative Communication This is a theoretical course that gives exposure on augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) among individuals who cannot communicate verbally. This course will provide basic knowledge on AAC in terms of types, methods and characteristics of AAC, and rationales in choosing AAC. List of text/reference books: 1. Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Management of Communication Disorders in Children and Adults, Baltimore: Brookes Publishers, 1998. Tetzchner, S. V. & Martinsen, H., Introduction to Augmentative and Alternative Communication, London: Whurr Publishers, 2000. Lloyd, L. L., Fuller, D. R., & Arvidson, H. H. (Eds.), Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Handbook of Principles and Practices, Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1997.

2. 3.

GTP402/6-Research Project This is a one-term course that requires students to complete a research project under supervision. Research topics may be in the field of speech pathology or other related fields such as linguistics, psychology, special education or audiology. At the end of the term, students are required to present their final outcomes and produce a complete thesis to be assessed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Silverman, F. H., Research Design and Evaluation in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, 4th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1998. Kuzma, J. W. & Bohnenblust, S. E., Basic Statistics for the Health Sciences, Mountain View: Mayfield Pub., 2001. Ruscello, D. M., Tests and Measurements in Speech-Language Pathology, Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.

189

GTP404/2-Dysphagia This is a theoretical course in the study of dysphagia. It focuses on swallowing problems especially among adults and feeding difficulties especially among children. The topics covered include the signs, symptoms and etiologies of dysphagia. This course also discusses the methods of assessments and principles of interventions in managing individuals with dysphagia. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Aevedson, J. C. & Brodsky, L., Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding, San Diego.: Singular Publishing Group, 2002. Logemann, J., Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders, 2nd Ed., Texas: Pro-ed., 1998. Carrau, R. L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999.

GTP405/2-Speech Pathology Seminar and Professional Issues This course provides a platform to students to polish their skills in critical assessments and presentation of topics and issues in the field of speech pathology. This course also focuses on the professional issues such as ethical codes, roles and responsibilities and multidisciplinary issues that will be encountered by speech pathologist in their professional work. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lubinski, R & Frattali, C., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, Albany: Delmar Learning, 2000. Silverman, F. H., Essential of Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, Long Grove: Waveland Press, 2003. Singh, S. & Kent, R. D., Illustrated Dictionary of Speech-Language Pathology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000.

GTP406/5-Speech Pathology Clinic VI In this course, students will manage referred patient and conduct the case on their own, especially for acquired neurogenic and dysphagia cases under supervision. Students will have to perform the interviewing session, related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly therapy plan and conduct the therapy session on their own. The students are also required to give counselling to the patient, where needed. The student must be able to make proper diagnosis and prognosis.

190

List of text/reference books: 1. 3. 3. Corbin-Lewis, K., Liss, J. M. & Sciortino, K., Clinical Anatomy and Physiology of The Swallow Mechanism, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2005. Leonard, R. & Kendall, K., Dysphagia Assessment and Treatment Planning, A Team Approach, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 1998. Irwin D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, P. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for Speech-Language Pathologist and Audiologist: An Illustrative Casebook, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2007.

GTP407/2-Learning Disabilities This course focuses on the learning and education aspects of children with communication disorders. It covers the theories and learning processes, etiologies and characteristics of learning disabilities. This course also emphasises on the relevant educational issues of children with communication disorders and learning disabilities. It covers Malaysian education system, special needs and services for the children with communication disorders and learning disabilities. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Lerner, J. W., Learning Disabilities Theories, Diagnosis and Teaching Strategies, 8th Ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2000. Fleming, P., Miller, C., & Wright, J., Speech and Language Difficulties in Education Approaches to Collaborative Practice for Teachers and Speech and Language Therapists, Oxon: Speechmark Publishing, 1997. Brown, F. R., Aylward, E. H., & Keogh, B. K., Diagnosis and Management of Learning Disabilities An Interdisciplinary Lifespan Approach, 2nd Ed., Norwell, MA: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1992.

3.

GTS401/3-Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription In this course, the students are introduced the basic principles of physical fitness as well as the adoption of a regular program of prescribed physical exercise, the health-related components of fitness and exercise prescription for endurance, strength, and flexibility. Students will be able to determine fitness and stress status and to implement suitable exercise programs. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Franklin, B.A. (Ed.), ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 7th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. Golding, L. A., YMCA Fitness Testing and Assessment Manual, 4th Ed., Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc., 2000. Nieman, D.C., Exercise Testing and Prescription: A Health-Related Approach, 6th Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2007

191

GTS402/6-Research Projects In this course, the students will be exposed to the research process that requires skill in planning, handling and analysis of data. The students have to submit their dissertation in the given format. List of text/reference books: Journal and other references based on areas of research being chosen. GTS403/4-Industrial Training The course will enable the students to gain experience in actual working environment in the exercise and sports industry. During attachment, they will be involved in day-to-day activities of exercise, sports and therapeutic methods in the relevant organisation. List of text/reference books: Journal and other references based on areas of research being choosen. GTS404/2Lifetime Wellness and Leisure Activities This course provides orientation to concepts and skills to help promote enjoyable participation in leisure activities in order to create a desire to be physically active for life. Students will be introduced to various specific leisure skills, activities and programs that are beneficial to personal wellness. Hiking/camping, jogging, swimming, bowling and golf are among the lifetime leisure activities that could help to improve the quality of life. The relationship between each activity to physical and mental wellness will also be emphasised List of text/reference books: 1. Corbin, C.B., Welk, G.J., Corbin, W.R. and Welk, K.A., Concepts of Fitness and Wellness: A Comprehensive Lifestyle Approach, 7th Ed., Boston, MA: McGraw Hill, 2008. Ettinger, W.H., Wright, B.S. and Blair, S.N., Fitness After 50. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2006. Mood, D.P., Musker, F.F. & Rink, J.E., Sports and Recreational Activities, 14th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007.

2. 3.

GTS405/3-Sports Management In this course, basics of sports organisation, student hierarchy of sports organisation and their role in the development of sports will be explored. Basic management of physical education and sports plus the detailed explaination of management and running of various physical education and sports programs will be covered.

192

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bucher C.A. Krotee M.L., Management of Physical Education and Sports, 12th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2002. Appenzeller H., Risk Management in Sport: Issues and Strategies, Durham, N.C.: Carolina Academic Press 1998. Horine L., Administration of Physical Education and Sport Programs, 4th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999.

GTS406/3-Adapted Physical Activity The course aims to provide knowledge and understanding to the students on the recent concepts, trends and information regarding adapted physical activity and sports. The students will also learn the different types of disabilities that affect physical and motor performance as well as the physical adaptation adopted by the special group. This course is developed to raise awareness and understanding for adapted physical activity and sports that will further benefit the special community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Claudine, S. Adapted physical activity, recreation, and sport: Crossdisciplinary and lifespan, 6th Ed., Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2004. DePauw, K.P. & Gavron, S.J., Disability Sport, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Lewis V., Development and Disability, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Blackwell Publishing, 2003.

GTS407/3-Therapeutic Exercises The course covers the study of the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the human population and the effects of physical activity on them. Students will be exposed to how exercise is used in the prevention and treatment of chronic diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Saltin B. (ed), Exercise and Circulation in Health and Disease, Champaign, Illinois: Human Kinetics, 2000. American College of Sports Medicine, ACSM's Exercise Management for Person's with Chronic Diseases and Disabilities, 2nd Ed., Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003. Ehrman J.K., Gordon P.M., Visich P.S. and Keteyian S.J., Clinical Exercise Physiology, Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003.

3.

193

GTX402/2-Brachytherapy This course will discuss various physical aspects and dosimetry related to brachytherapy. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., Wiley-Liss, 2005. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003.

GTX405/2-Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I This course provides the students with theoretical and practical knowledge in the QA of equipments for diagnostic imaging like general radiography, fluoroscopy radiography and mammography imaging. Students will carry out QA tests based on recent standards and protocols to ensure that proper functioning of diagnostic equipment for patient service. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stevens, A.T., Quality Management for Radiographic Imaging: A Guide for Technologists, 1st Ed., Mc Graw-Hill, 2001. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.

GTX406/6Research Project This course will provide students an opportunity to conduct their own research by choosing any one project in the area of nuclear medicine, diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy or radiation protection. Student will start identifying the project and supervisor in the first semester of the final year. List of text/reference books: Journals and other references based on areas of research being chosen. GTX407/3Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II This course will discuss all aspects of QA in radiotherapy and nuclear medicine including administration, regulation, equipment and treatment. Students will perform practical sessions related to QA tests of the major equipment used in nuclear medicine and radiotherapy based on recent standards and protocols.

194

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Springer, 2005. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003.

GTX408/3Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy This course will focus on manual methods of dose calculations for radiation treatment. Students will also learn the procedures and techniques in treatment planning including procedure simulation. The use of computers to calculate the dose distribution inside the patient to be treated will be demonstrated. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Jayaramans, S and Lanzl, L.H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics, 2nd Ed., Springer-Verlag, 2004. Khan, F.M., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006.

GTX410/4Imaging Techniques II This course involves practical and clinical training related to medical imaging in hospitals. Students will learn the procedures used in radiology including computed tomography (CT), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and digital subtraction angiography (DSA). Various aspects of dosimetry and QA related to medical imaging using radiation will be introduced to students. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006. Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy, Elsevier Mosby, 2005. Ballinger, P.W. and Frank, E.D., Merrills Atlas of Radiographic Positions and Radiological Procedures, 10th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 1999.

GTX 411/4Radiotherapy Techniques In this course, the students will be attached to the Radiotherapy and Nuclear Medicine department under minimum supervision.

195

The students will be trained to take part in various processes in radiotherapy like simulation, treatment planning, dose calculation, patient positioning and handling of treatment machines. The students will also be trained to learn special techniques in radiotherapy like SRT, radiosurgery and brachytherapy. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., William and Wilkins, 2003. Bomford, C.K. and Sheriff, S.B., Walter and Millers Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003.

GTX412/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques In this course, the students will be attached to Nuclear Medicine unit at HUSM. The students will be trained to handle nuclear medicine imaging procedures such as 2dimensional imaging and SPECT (Single Photon Emission Computed Tomography). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Shackett, P., Nuclear Medicine Technology: Procedures and Quick Reference, 2nd Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2009, Baltimore. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Springer, 2005, London. Christian, P.E., Nuclear Medicine and PET: Technology and Techniques, Waterstram-Rich, K.M., 6th Ed., Mosby, 2007, St Louis.

GTX413/3Professional Training The aim of this course is to give the students the opportunity to observe the application of medical radiation science in a working environment including the diagnosis and treatment of patients, research and radiation protection activities. This also includes the activities carried out by the companies that supply, install and commission radiation equipments to medical centres. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Washington C.M. and Leaver D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004.

196

7. Elective Courses

197

GEG103/3-Fitness and Health The course exposes students to the theory, principle and basic methods of fitness and sport activities in human fitness and health. Students will also use the methods learned to monitor personal changes that happens at respective levels of health and fitness. Positive behaviour and healthy lifestyle habits will also be emphasised. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hoeger W.W.K. and Hoeger S. A. Fitness and Wellness, (8th Ed.), Wadsworth Cengage Learning, 2009. Anspaugh D.J., Hamrick M.H. and Rosato F. D., Wellness : Concepts and Application (7th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2009. Corbin C.B. et al, Concepts of Physical Fitness: Active Lifestyles for Wellness (14th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2008.

GEG109/2-History of Health Sciences This course exposes the history and development of science and medicine. It covers historical aspects of Greek philosophy, modern medicine and history of medicine from the earlier years to the present. Aspects of social sciences, religion, philosophy of physical sciences, behavioral sciences, biological sciences and medicine outside of Europe including the impact of Islam in the field of medicine and health will also be explored. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Spector, R.E., Cultural Diversity In Health And Illness, New Jersey : Prentice Hall, 2010. Weiss, G.L. & Lonnquist, L.E., The Sociology Of Health, Healing And Illness, New Jersey : Prentice Hall, 2009. Osman Bakar, Tawhid And Science, Shah Alam : Arah Publication, 2008.

GEG114/2-Oral Health This course provides essential information regarding the teeth and relevant structures of the oral cavity. It coves the etiology and pathogenesis of common oral diseases such as caries and periodontal disease. Preventive strategies and oral hygiene methods are elaborated. Pertinent issues such as diet and fluoride in the prevention of oral diseases are highlighted. The importance of oral health in relation to systemic health is described and oral health services and promotion in Malaysia will be discussed. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. Murray, JJ. Prevention of Oral Diseases, (4th Ed.) Oxford University Press, 2003. Pine, CM. Community Oral Health Oxford Wright Publications 2001.

198

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Scully, C. ABC of Oral Health. London: BMJ Books, 2002. Wilkins, EM. Clinical Practice of the Dental Hygienist, (9th Ed.) Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005. Scully, C. Color Atlas of Orofacial Health & Disease in Children and Adolescents, (2nd Ed.) London: Martin Dunitz, 2002. Darby, ML. Dental Hygiene: Theory and Practice. (2nd Ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders, 2003. Palmer, CA. Diet & Nutrition in Oral Health. Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2003.

GEG116/2-Principles and Training of Aerobics The course prepares the student with theoretical and practical knowledge of aerobic exercises. It covers the basic knowledge of aerobics, energy systems used as well as the directly related body systems when exercising. For the practical sessions, the course will emphasise on how to carry out an aerobic training and exercise session. The course will also expose students to music selection and the organization for a session of aerobic exercise. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bricker, K., Traditional Aerobics, San Diego, CA: American Council on Exercise, 2000. Bishop, D., Fitness Through Aerobics, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Higher Education, 2002. Mazzeo, K.S. Fitness Through Aerobics and Step Training (3rd Ed.), Wadsworth/Thomson Learning. 2002.

GEG 117/2-Principle and Training of Football The course prepares the students with theoretical and practical knowledge of football. It covers the basic knowledge of football history, rules of the game, technical skills needed, tactics and system of football games. Type of training and variation needed to increase endurance, strength, speed and motor ability will also be given. The course will further expose students to several competition formats in the sport of football. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Heisman, John, Principles of Football, Publisher: Hill Street Press,US, 2006. Jens Bangsbo, Fitness Training in Soccer - A Scientific, Reedswain Publishing 2006. Alan Hargreaves, Dick Bate, Skills and Strategies for Coaching Soccer - The Complete Soccer Coaching Manual, Human Kenetics, 2009. Debra LaPrath, Coaching Girls' Soccer Successfully, Human Kinetics 2008.

199

GTK103/3-Biodiversity This course introduces students to the macro and microorganisms that make up the world that we know.The students will also be exposed to the classification systems that are used to organise flora and fauna. The impact of biodiversity to socioeconomic and scientific activities will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Neil A. Campbell, Lawrence G., Mitchell & Jane B. Reece, Biology : Concepts & Connections, Addison Wesley Longman, 2000. Sandra Alters, Biology: Understanding Life, Jones & Bartlett Publisthers, 2000. Sylvia S. Mader, Inquiry Into Life, McGraw-Hill, 2000. Sylvia S. Mader, Biology, McGraw-Hill, 2001. Neil A. Campbell & Jane B. Reece, Essential Biology, Addison Wesley Longman, 2001. Groombridge B, Jenkins MD, World Atlas of Biodiversity: Earth's Living Resources in the 21st Century, University of California, 2002. Sylvia S. Mader, Inquiry Into Life, 10th. Ed., MacGraw-Hill, 2003.

GEG201/2-Womens Health This course will introduce the new definition and paradigm of womens health. Students will be exposed to a more holistic way of looking at womens health and not limited to only child and maternal health, as has traditionally been the case. The fact that men and women faces different experiences in their requirement of care and needs of health, should encourage the students to apply gender perspective in their analysis of womens health. Several factors that influence womens health such as economics, politics, religion and socio-culture will also be examined. Issues of research in womens health will also be discussed. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. Gwyn Kirk, Margo Okazawa-Rey, Womens Lives: Multicultural Perspectives, (5th Ed.), McGraw Hill, San Francisco 2010. Cheryl A. Kolander, Danny Ramsey Ballard, Cynthia Kay Chandler, Contemporary Womens Health: Issues for Today and the Future, (4th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2011. Mima Cattan, Mental Health and Well-Being in Later Life, Ist Edition, McGraw Hill, 2009. Youngkin & Davis, Womens Health: A Primary Care Clinical Guide, Prentice Hall, 2004. Condon, Womens Health: Body, Mind, Spirit: An Integrated Approach to Wellness and Illness, Prentice Hall, 2004.

3. 4. 5.

200

GEG203-Health Economics The course contains the theory of microeconomic analysis, its usage in the health service as well as its relevance in health organizations and delivery of health services to society. Economic analysis as the basis of decision making at the individual as well as at the society levels will be discussed. This course will also examine the demand and supply of health services. Issues on cost for health services and delivery will also be included in discussions. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hoeger W.W.K. and Hoeger S. A. Fitness and Wellness 8th Edition, Wadsworth Cengage Learning, 2009. Anspaugh D.J., Hamrick M.H. and Rosato F. D. Wellness: Concepts and Application, (7th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2009. Corbin C.B. et al. Concepts of PhysicalFitness: Active Lifestyles for Wellness (14th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2008. Corbin C.B. et al. Concepts of Physical Fitness: A Comprehensive Lifestyle Approach, (7th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2008. Greenberg G.S., Dintiman G.B. and Oaks B.M. Physical Fitness and Wellness: Changing the Way You Look, Feel and Perform, (3rd Ed.), Human Kinetics, 2004.

GEG204/3-Gender Perspectives In Health This course will introduce students to a framework of analysis to understand the reason for gender to be an important determinant factor in health. Students will examine the interaction between gender and other factors in determining health and illness in society. The course will also discuss the different health risks faced by men and women and the type of approaches that should be considered especially those based on gender perspective, by policy makers, health research so that effective information and treatment can be delivered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Gillian Bendelow ed. (et al.), Gender, Health and Healing the Public/Private Divide, London: Routledge, 2002. Amy J. Schulz, Leith Mullings (Eds), Gender, Race, Class, and Health : Intersectional Approaches, San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 2006. Women, Ageing and Health : A Framework For Action : Focus on Gender, Geneva: c2007. Chloe E. Bird, Patricia P. Rieker (Eds). Gender and Health: The Effects of Constrained Choices and Social Policies, Cambridge,Cambridge University Press, 2008. World Health Organization Western Pacific Region, Integrating Poverty and Gender Into Health Programmes: A Sourcebook for Health Professionals, Manila, Philippines, c2008.

5.

201

GEG208/2-Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations This course exposes students to management activities related to planning, recruitment, training and development, performance management and control of human resources in healthcare organizations. Students will also be equipped with several approaches in handling issues of human resources, in clinical and non-clinical disciplines. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ab. Aziz Yusof, Pengurusan Sumber Manusia : Konsep, Isu dan Pelaksanaan, Petaling Jaya: Prentice Hall Pearson Malaysia Sdn. Bhd., 2002. Flynn, Walter J. et al., Healthcare Human Resource Management, New York: Thomson Learning, 2003. Mathis, Robert L. and Jackson, John H., Human Resource Management: Essential Perspectives, New York : Thomson Learning, 2004.

GEG209/2-Ecosystem Aquatic This is an introducsory course of aquatic ecosystem. It will focus on the principles of aquatic ecosystems, with special reference to populations and their ecosystems, distribution, a biotic/biotic communities and incorporation of the aquatic ecosystems and its relationship to human health. By the end of the semester, students can understand the main ideas and empirical findings of the major areas of aquatic ecological science. This course will help student to explore thinking knowledge on aquatic ecology. Emphasis also will be given on identification of aquatic natural disturbances and/or anthropogenic as well as adaptation of aquatic ecosystems to disturbance. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Karleskint G., James S. and Turner R., Introduction to Marine Biology, (2nd. Ed.) Brooks Cole, 2005. Wetzel G.R., Lake and River Ecosystems, (3rd Ed), Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2001. Livingston R.J., Restoration of Aquatic Systems, CRC Press, 2005.

GEG213/3-Stress Management In this course, the student will have the opportunity to understand the holistic nature (mind-body-spirit) of stress management and comprehend the mind-body connection of the stress and disease process; master the basic understanding of the physiological mechanisms responsible for the fight-or-flight response and subsequent manifestations of various symptoms of target organ dysfunctions; understand the importance of using effective coping skills to resolve stressful perceptions and gain a sense of wholeness and inner peace by using these skills. Learn about and experience several relaxation techniques and learn to integrate these techniques into your daily living habits to help you control stress and tension; and participate in all class discussions and relaxation techniques.

202

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Olpin, M. & Hesson, M.. Stress Management for Life: A Research-Based Experimental Approach. St. Paul, Minnesota: Brooks Cole Pub Co., 2007. Palmer, S. & Puri, A. Coping With Stress at University: A Survival Guide. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Pub. Inc., 2006. Coon, D. Psychology: A Modular Approach to Mind and Behaviour. Boston, MA: Thomson Wadsworth, 2005.

GEG214/2-Personality and Health This course enables the students to describe how the study of psychological principles applies to personality, describe the Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design used in personality psychology, understand and describe the six domains of knowledge through which the field is exploring human nature and this thing called 'personality, compare and contrast these domains of knowledge in the study of personality, describe the core theorists involved in the exploration of personality and understand the development of personality and its interaction to ones health in order to understand themselves and others. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Cloniger, S., Theories of Personality: Understanding Persons (5th Ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2007. Larsen, R.J., & Burn, D.M., Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature (4th Ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Mischel, W., Shoda, Y., & Smith, R. E.. Introduction to Personality: Toward an Integration (7th Ed.). New Jersey: Wiley & Sons, 2004.

GEG302/3-Violence and Society The focus of this course is on personal violence, violence on human beings and on humanity. It will be divided into two main components. The first part looks at the concept of violence in society and factors that influence the action. The second part touches on the question of interpersonal violence, especially in the family, such as violence towards partners, children and the elderly. The course will also look into the theory and practice of intervention in handling violence. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Holmes, S.T. & Holmes RM, Violence A Contemporary Reader, Pearson, New Jersey, 2004. Burns, Ronald, Culture As A Determinant of Crime, Environment and Behavior, Vol. 32 Issue 3, p347, 2000. Van Creveld, Martin, A Womans Place : Reflections of The Origins of Violence, Social Research, Vol. 67 Issue 3, p825, 2000.

203

GEG303/2-Tissue Banking The course exposes students to basic theories and principles in tissue banking. Students will also learn the various processing method of tissues and the clinical application of the processed tissue grafts. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. G.O. Phillips, R. Von Versen, D.M Strong , Advances in Tissue Banking Vol. 5, Nather, S'pore, 2001. Julia M Polak, Larry L Hench, P Kemp, Future Strategies for Tissue and Organ Replacement, Imperial College Press, 2002. Aziz Nather, Norimah Yusof, Nazly Hilmy, Radiation in Tissue Banking Basic Science and Clinical Applications of Irradiated Tissue Allografts, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., 2007.

GEG304/2-Communication and Self Development This course will introduce students to several communication skills in order to develop their self image and generate self development. The course will also emphasis on public speaking, handling of interview, presentation of working paper as well as developing self confidence and assertiveness. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Charles J. Stewards, William B. Cash. Jr, Interviewing: Principles and Practices, 12th Ed., Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2008. Charles S. Carver, Michael F. Scheier, Perpectives on Personality, 6th Ed., Pearson Education, Inc., 2008. Paul Nelson, Scott Titsworth, Judy Pearson, iSpeak: Public Speaking for Contemporary Life, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2010. Rahmat Ismail, Etika Sosial Satu Peradaban dalam Kehidupan Sosial Manusia, Utusan Publications Distributors, Sdn. Bhd., 2001. Stephen E. Lucas, The Art of Public Speaking, 10th Ed., Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2009.

GEG305/2- Forensic Science This course introduces students to forensic science investigations. It covers crime scene investigation topics such compilations of photographs and the storage of evident materials as well as various marks that can be used in the identification of individuals or objects. General knowledge regarding firearms, forensic toxicology, body fluid, DNA, analytical instrumentation, fire investigations and explosive will be introduced. Topics in Forensic medicines such as sudden death and post mortem will be included in this module.

204

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Max, M. H. and Jay, A. S.. Fundamentals of Forensic Sciences. Elsevier Academic Press, 2006. Saferstein, R.. Criminalistics: An introduction to Forensic Sciences (8th Ed.) Prentice-Hall, 2004. Stuart, H. J., Jon, J. N. Forensic Sciences: An Introduction to Scientific and Investigative Techniques. CRC Press, 2003.

GEG308/2-Tropical Natural Resource Management The course will focus on basic component of environmental sources with emphasis on environmental problems such as pollution and extinction of the natural resource. These include emphasis on concepts necessary to formulate and achieve specific management goals and objectives; comprehensive natural resource planning processes; and social and institutional dimensions of management. This course will highlight the integration of development, health and environmental issues. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Bruce Mitchell, Managing Our Natural Resources, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education, 2001. Tim, W. Clark. Andrew R. Willard & Christina, M. Cromleys, Foundations of Natural Resources Policy and Management, Yale University, 2000. Budy P. Resosudarmo, The Politics and Economics of Indonesia's Natural Resources. Institute of Southeast Asian Studies: Singapore, 2005.

3.

GEG309/2-Principles of Forensic Dentistry This course details the application of dental science knowledge for forensic work such as human identification and bitemark investigation. Students will be exposed to the theory and some practices in forensic dental work such as bitemark analyses and identification process using dental records. Students will also be introduced to disaster victim identification and record management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. C. Micheal Bowers, Forensic Dental Evidence: An Investigators Handbook, 1st Ed., Elsevier Academic Press, 2004. Herbert Blitzer, Jack Jacobia, Forensic Digital Imaging and Photography, Indiana, USA, 2002. David R. Senn and Paul G. Stimson, Forensic Dentistry, 2nd. Ed., CRC Press Taylor and Francis Group, USA, 2010.

205

GEG 311/2-Botany and Health The course provide student with understanding on importance of plant in medical and healthcare through history of plant usage, drug development, conservations and preservation and the commercialization of medicinal plant product. List of text/reference books: 1. Lewis, W, Walter, H and Memory, R. F.Elvin-Lewis, Medical Botany: Plants Affecting Human Health. (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons. Inc., Hoboken, NJ., 2003. Sneader, W., Drug Discovery: A History. John Wiley & Sons. England, 2005. Chooi, O. H., Tumbuhan Liar: Khasiat Ubatan dan Kegunaan Lain. Utusan Publication & Distributors Sdn. Bhd., 2004.

2. 3.

LAA100/2Arabic Language I This course introduces Arabic letters to the students, pronounce and write it correctly. The students practice to communicate about themselves, family and friends by using the language properly and using the vocabulary accurately with the application in basic grammar in communication. The students also learn to make simple sentences by using the elementary in vocabulary in a good manner and in a positive way which is included in the course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007. Kershul, K.K, Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A.. Al-Arabiah Baina Yadaik, Students Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah, Kaherah, 2001. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu , Seri Kota Publications, 2001. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha (1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia.

LAJ100/2Japanese Language I This course enambles students to apply the basic grammar in writing and speaking, recognize the hiraganas letter, pronounce it nicely and write it correctly, interact in daily conversation based on certain situation and discuss about 3 elements on culture, lifestyle and matter which are related with Japan.

206

List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004. Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now Youre Talking. Japan:3A Corporation, 2003.

LAA200/2Arabic Language II This course is a continuation of Arabic Language I. The brief description about the basic script of Arabic are given as a revision. In this course, students were taught the appropriate skill of communication. The students will learn the nouns, verbs, and conjuctions in Arabic as well additional vocabulary. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007. Kershul, K.K.. Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A., Al-Arabiah Baina Yadaik, Students Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar, Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah, Kaherah, 2001. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha (1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia

5. 6.

LAJ200/2Japanese Language II This is a continuation of Japanes Language I. In this course, the students will apply the verbs broadly especially in using the conjunction, use more in basic sentence for speaking exercise, read and write in katakanas letter and apply the basic sentences in daily conversation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004 Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now Youre Talking. Japan : 3A Corporation 2003.

207

7.

FACILITIES AVAILABLE AT THE SCHOOL

The buildings of School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipments. IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the Multi-Media Laboratories of the School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11.30 pm. All laboratory requirements are provided complete with instruments and equipments within a new modern building. Library, hostels and the sports complex with their respective ancillary facilities are provided for students at the USM Health Campus.

208

8.

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SCHOOL 8.1 8.1.1 CAREER GUIDANCE Biomedicine

Career prospects for the Biomedicine programme include: 1. Science or research officers at research institutes, institutions of higher learning, hospitals, public and private medical diagnostic laboratories. Production and administrative officers in related industries including Quality Control officers, sales personnel and advisors in the pharmaceutical, food and beverage industries, suppliers of medical products and instrumentations and as environmental officers. Tutors/Lecturers at institutions of higher learning at both private and public sectors. Graduates can also register as graduate students or join the academic staff training programmes at any of the institutions of higher learning.

2.

3.

The examples given above are not restrictive and graduates can also involve themselves in many areas of scientific or commercial ventures that is available now or in development particularly in the biotechnology field. 8.1.2 Dietetics

Career opportunities for graduates of the Dietetic programme are ample in Malaysia and as well as in other countries. These include: 1. Dietetians, food services officers, dietetic counsellors in Government and Private hospitals, and Institutions of Higher Learning. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning. Diet consultants and nutritionist in the public and private sectors.

2.

3.

4.

209

8.1.3

Nursing Career opportunities in nursing are wide in Malaysia and overseas; these include:

1.

Nurses at government hospitals and private hospitals as clinical nurses or as nursing experts or administrators. Nursing administrators at rehabilitative and nursing educational institutions, nurse counselors and occupational health nurses in the various manufacturing industries. Officers in research institutions, hospitals and diagnostic laboratories of both public and private sectors. Administrators or production officers in pharmaceutical and other health related industries. Nurses at gerontology rehabilitation and sheltered homes for the elderly, and other health organisations that require nurses. Forensic nurses at specialised institutions like forensic science of the Police Force and rehabilitative centres. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning. Nurses as community nurses providing services to public. Forensic Science

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 8.1.4

Career prospects for the Forensic Science graduates include: 1. Service at the forensic services of the Royal Malaysian Police, Department of Chemistry, Fire and Rescue Department and the Army. Science or research officers at research institutes or institutions of higher learning, private and public hospitals and diagnostic laboratories.

2.

210

3.

Production, administrative or sales personnels of industries such as pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, reagent suppliers and biomedical instrument suppliers as well as environmental officers. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning.

4.

It must be emphasised that the examples of jobs given are not limited to those mentioned. The curricula which are offered by the School are flexible enough to provide graduates with skills and abilities which will enable them to prospects jobs in a wider domain including Private Investigation and Insurance Investigation. And other forensic related areas. Opportunities are wide for high achieving students to pursue post-graduate courses and become teaching staffs of the future at institutions of higher learning. 8.1.5 Medical Radiation

Career prospects for graduates of the Medical Radiation programme are wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 1. Radiation protection officers at government and private hospitals, research institutions and public and private health organisations. Personnel involved in commercial activities within the production industries related to the field and also in the health care industries. Science or research officers at institutions of higher education. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher education. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher education.

2.

3.

4.

211

8.1.6

Audiology

The graduates from the Audiology programme may provide services or work at various settings: 1. As audiologists at medical settings (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centres); educational settings (e.g. special education schools, early intervention centers); or private practice offices. As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of higher learning. As researchers at the institutes of higher learning, research laboratories or centres. Speech Pathology

2.

3.

8.1.7

Qualified professionals in Speech Pathology are known as Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertututran) in the government sector or Speech Pathologist in the private sector. 1. Job opportunities in this profession are immense, including in the: - Health sectors (government hospital, private hospital or private practice) - Education sectors (special school or normal school) - Non-government sectors (intervention center or rehabilitation center) - Community and welfare sectors (community based rehabilitation center) Additionally, they also can - become academic staffs at the university as clinical supervisors or lecturers (after completing postgraduate degrees at masters/doctor of philosophy levels) - conduct research and development as researchers - manage related institutions as the managing officers.

2.

212

8.1.8

Exercise and Sport Sciences

The graduates from the Exercise and Sports Science programme may provide services or work at various settings: 1. As science/research/sports officers in medical institutions (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centers, Youth and Sports Departments); educational settings (e.g. special education schools, sport schools, early intervention centers, universities); sports institutions and associations (National Sports Institute, BAM, FAM) or private practising organisation As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of higher learning. As coaches, sports science consultants, sports administratives and managers, sports physiotherapist, health coordinator, health club managers in both government and private sector. Nutrition

2.

3.

8.1.9

Career opportunities for graduate of the Nutrition programme are wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 1. 2. Nutritionists in the public and private sectors. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution.

3.

213

8.1.10

Environmental and Occupational Health

Career opportunities for graduates of the Environmental and Occupational Health programme are wide (public and private sectors, industries and NGOs) in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 1. Health and safety officers, environmental health officers and safety supervisors. EMS engineers, EHS executives, health promotion officers and operation officers. Training officers and marketing executives Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution.

2.

3. 4.

5.

8.2

PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST The School is continually soliciting funds for the setting up of gold medal awards to be awarded to the best final year students in all programmes as well as funds for other prizes and awards. Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester will receive the Deans' List Certificate. 8.3 SOCIETY Students of the School of Health Sciences automatically become the members of the Health Science Society of the University. 8.4 POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES The School of Health Sciences offers Masters (M.Sc.) and doctrate (Ph.D.) courses via research mode in many disciplines such as Biomedicine (e.g. Immunology, Microbiology, Pharmacology), Dietetics, Forensic Science (e.g. DNA fingerprinting and toxicology) and many others. Candidates shall have graduated with a Bachelors degree from recognised universities and obtained a CGPA of at least 2.75 for the Masters programme and 3.67 or graduate with a Masters for the Ph.D. programme. However students with a CGPA of less than 2.75 may be considered if they possess appropriate and relevant

214

working experience or experience in research. Interested candidates can contact the Deputy Dean (Research) Post Graduate Studies or the USM Post Graduate Institute for further information. 8.5 OVERSEAS TRAINING SCHEME Universiti Sains Malaysia offers limited and highly competitive overseas training schemes to students of levels 100 and 200 who are interested to pursue courses of one semester duration at any foreign university. This scheme is devised with the purpose of exposing students to experience studying at the international level with the possibility of credit transfers. For further details of this scheme can be obtained from the office of International Office, Division of Academic and International Affairs, USM, www.usm.my/ro.

215

10. DIPLOMA OF NURSING

216

ACADEMIC STAFF OF DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME LECTURERS/TUTORS

NO. 1. DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Pn. Norizam Programme 7734 nrizam@kck.usm.my Muhammad Yusof Chairman (Acting) /Tutor Pn. Noor Aini Hussain Senior Lecturer 7531 nooraini@kb.usm.my Pn. Anisah Mat Desa Tutor 7744 anisahmd@kck.usm.my Pn. Azlida Abd Kadir Tutor 7733 azlida@kck.usm.my Pn. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 fazdillah@kck.usm.my Pn. Hasni Embong Tutor 7741 ehasni@kck.usm.my Pn. Low Kim Lian Tutor 7747 kimlian@kck.usm.my Pn. Mas Nor Saloni Tutor 7732 mnsaloni@kck.usm.my Ibrahim Pn. Noor Jasmani Tutor 7746 nrjasmani@kck.usm.my Hassan Pn. Nor Rahan Tutor 7749 norrahan@kk.usm.my Mohamad Pn. Norliza Hussin Tutor 7745 norliza@kck.usm.my Pn. Nurhayati Tutor 7742 hayatimn@kck.usm.my Mohamad Nor Pn. Tuan Ruasmani Tutor 7750 ruasmani@kk.usm.my Tuan Daud Pn. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 zuraida@kck.usm.my Pn. Chu Be Lai Clinical 6672 chubelai@kck.usm.my Instructor Pn. Halizan Yusof Clinical 6672 Instructor Pn. Masturah Hamzah Clinical 6672 Instructor Pn. Norizan Che Mohd Clinical 6672 eijann@kck.usm.my Yusoff Instructor Pn. Zaharah Muhamad Clinical 6672 Instructor NURSING PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Programme 7540 Chairman (Acting)/ Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7652 Senior Lecturer 7577 Senior Lecturer 7550 NURSING PROGRAMME

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

NO. 1.

NAME Cik Supaletchimi Katherason

EMAIL supa0026@kb.usm.my

2. 3. 4.

Dr. Lim Phaik Hooi Pn. Che Rabiaah Mohamed Pn. Jayah K. Pubalan

limph@kb.usm.my crabiaah@kck.usm.my jayahkp@kck.usm.my

217

NO. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

NAME Cik Kasmah Wati Pardi Cik Radziah Mohd Fauzi Pn. Rahimah Mohd Anshari Pn. Sabarishah Hashim (Study Leave) Pn. Dariah Mohd Yusoff (Study Leave) Cik Norazliah Hj Samsudin Pn. Rosmawati Mohamed Dr. Soon Lean Keng Pn. Intan Idiana Hassan Pn. Zakira Mamat @ Mohamed (Study Leave) Pn. Hartini Muhamad Cik Nik Asiah Nik Lah Pn. Nik Nor Azlina Abd. Kadir Cik Siti Aishah Haji Ghazali Pn. Zahniyah Che Ishak

POSITION Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer

TELEPHONE 7533 7588 7558 -

EMAIL kasmah@kb.usm.my radziah@kb.usm.my rahimahm@kb.usm.my risha@kck.usm.my dariah@kb.usm.my

Lecturer Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer

7557 7611 7546 7636 7554

azliah@kck.usm.my roswati@kck.usm.my soonlk@kb.usm.my idiana@kk.usm.my zakira@kck.usm.my

Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor

7735 7735 7738 7737 7736

tini@kck.usm.my nikasiah@kck.usm.my nikazlina@kck.usm.my schah@kck.usm.my zahniyah@kck.usm.my

218

INTRODUCTION The Diploma in Nursing Programme is one of the programmes is offered by the School of Health Sciences since the 2007/2008 session in response to the rapid development in medical technology and increasing number of government and private hospitals, where the demand for nurses has escalated to a critical level. The shortage of nurses has affected the quality of health services. The structuring of the Diploma in Nursing Programme is based on the criteria set by the Malaysian Nursing Board that a nursing programme must have sufficient nursing skills training components to enable the students to register with the Malaysian Nursing Board. It also fits the aim of the university to produce nursing graduates who possess excellent academic knowledge as well as competent clinical skills in order to achieve the nations aspiration in producing a healthy society. This programme covers six (6) semesters of three (3) years. The programme encompasses the following aspects:(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Biological Science Behavioural Science Nursing Science Technical Skills Co-Curriculum

These aspects are incorporated in the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic knowledge in nursing practice as well as scientific knowledge with the hope to produce nurses who are competent, of calibre, innovative, proactive, critical in thinking and independent. This will assist in enhancing professionalism and the image of nursing for the benefit of clients, society and the country. AIM OF THE PROGRAMME To produce trained nurses who are caring, practice safe nursing, competent and able to analyse critically in problem solving at any health institution. OBJECTIVES OF THE PREGRAMME To fulfill demand of nurses needed by hospitals and clinics in the future. To produce trained nurses who are able to deliver efficient services to individual and community. To provide basic nursing education which enables students to proceed to degree level.

219

LEARNING OUTCOME At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply nursing theory and practice comprehensively in nursing care. (A3, C3, P4) PO2: Demonstrate technical skills in analysis and problem solving related to nursing diagnosis. (C3, P4, CT1-3, P4) PO3: Apply critical thinking skills in assessment of patient for effective nursing care and interventions. (A3, CT1-4) PO4: Apply communication skills in the assessment and problem solving in nursing care and practices. (A3, CS1-4) PO5: Organize and execute nursing tasks as a team of healthcare professionals in caring for patients. (A4, CS5, TS1-5) PO6: Display ethics and professional values in nursing practice. (A5, P4, EM1-3) PO7: Apply nursing knowledge and manipulate resources for effective nursing care and interventions. (P4, L2, S3, LL1-3) PO8: Exhibit values of leadership as a group in nursing practice.(P4,S4, LS1-3) PO9: Explore and identify opportunities of enterpreneurship to enhance social functions and responsibilities. (C3, KK1)

220

COURSE DURATION Three (3) years for full time course include both theory and practical. QUALIFICATION 1. SPM QUALIFIED UNIVERSITY GENERAL REQUIREMENT Pass SPM / equivalent examination Pass with credit in Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia for SPM / equivalent examination SPECIAL PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT Pass SPM / equivalent with five (5) credit in these subjects: 1. Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia 2. Rampaian Sains / Biology 3. Mathematic 4. Bahasa Inggeris 5. One (1) other subject ENTRY APPLICATION Form can be downloaded from USM website at www.usm.my. Send complete application form with RM60.00 POSTAL ORDER paid to Universiti Sains Malaysia to the address below: UNIT KEMASUKAN DAN PENGAMBILAN ARAS 2, BAHAGIAN PENGURUSAN AKADEMIK JABATAN PENDAFTAR UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA 11800 USM, PULAU PINANG

221

ACADEMIC SYSTEM DEFINITION Unit All courses will be assigned a value called UNIT. The unit is given value based on the scope of the curriculum, and the demand made of student in the courses; in general the unit is defined as follows: Type of Contact Type of Course Theory Courses

Practical or Laboratory Courses

Language Skill Courses

Industrial or Teacher Training Courses

Definition One unit is equivalent to one hour of contact time per week for the semester of between 13 - 14 weeks. One unit is equivalent to one and a half hours of contact time per semester of between 13 14 weeks. One unit is equavelent to one and a half hours of contact time per semester of between 13 14 weeks. One unit is equivalent to two weeks of training.

Students or group of students will usually come in contact with lecturers via lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory or field study sessions. Cumulative Credit Unit A unit that has been registered and passed called a Credit Unit. REGISTRATION OF COURSES (a) Online Course Registration Activities The online registration system requires that students register for courses every semester. Registration will be carried out on Friday or Saturday prior to the commencement of each semester. This is to ensure that teaching sessions can start on the first day of the semester. Time of registration is finalised by each School. Students must check on dates of registration activities on the respective School's notice board.

Prior to registration, students are requested to obtain the following items from their respective Schools:-

222

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Course Registration Form Statement of Cumulative Grade (CANGRED) Time Table of Academic Sessions List of Courses

Students are reminded that registration of courses is official and final. Due care should therefore be exercised in filling in details to avoid unnecessary complications. Extra care should be given to the following: (b) Course Code Value of Course Unit Type of Course Code Time Table for Academic Sessions Prerequisite Requirements of Courses Requirements of the School The minimum or maximum units which students are allowed to register.

Academic Advisor (i) Students must plan their entire course schedule to ensure that their choice of courses for any semester can be undertaken without undue problems. Prior to registration of courses, students are advised to meet with their academic advisors regarding choice of course for each semester. Students must obtain the signatures of their Academic Advisors for all courses to be registered.

(ii)

(iii)

(c)

Time Table and Course Lists Time table for the academic sessions and list of courses on offer for each semester can be obtained via the Schools web page at http://www.ppsk.usm.my. The time table is subject to change by lecturers concerned. Student must refer to this list when choosing and when obtaining information about a particular course. Students are not allowed to register for courses if there are clashes in the time table.

223

(d)

Registration of Language and Co-curricular Courses (i) All affairs related to the registration, dropping and addition of language courses will be handled by The Language & Translation Centre. Cocurricular courses will be handled by the Student Affairs & Development Divison of the University. Early registration of the Malay and English language courses will be at the Language & Translation Centre while Co-curricular (sports & cultural) courses will be done at the Student Affairs & Development Division. Online registration activities will only start after the process of choosing the courses and the course codes have been entered into the computer systems. Dropping of courses, if deemed necessary, must be done within the first week of the academic session. A fee of RM50.00 will be imposed if this is done after the first week. Regisration of Courses for Students designated as active Students must register the total number of units offered in every semester. Registration of Courses for Students on "Provisional" Status Registrable units for students on probationary status are limited to the following: Academic Status Provisional I (P1) Provisional II (P2) Maximum Unit 12 unit 10 unit

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

224

(e)

Status of Students and Level of Study Students are designated as equivalent to first, second, third or fourth year according to the total credit points accumulated as follows:Course of Study (Total Credit Unit Required for Graduation) 98 Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative Credit Acquired First 0 -35 Second 36 -62 Third 63 - 98

(f)

Course Confirmation Slip The confirmation slip given after registration of a course must be checked thoroughly to ensure that there are no errors. Any errors regarding courses must be corrected immediately at the respective school during the registration period.

(g)

Updating of Academic Records The latest academic records and information will be printed in the document designated as 'CANGRED' and in the course registration forms. Students are advised to check the information and details therein and make corrections, if necessary. Corrections can be made using appropriate forms obtainable from the respective schools/centre or the Records and Data Processing Unit, Aras 5, Chancellory Building. Students are responsible for updating their addresses in the event that they have changed their terms address, emergency address and/or permanent address.

(h)

Courses During the Long Semester Break (KSCP) These courses are only offered during the long break. They are offered only to students who obtained grade C-, D+, D, D-, F and DKin a course or courses that they have taken. Students given grade X and F* are not allowed to take the KSCP course examination. The objectives of the KSCP: To allow students who face time constraints in order to graduate. i) ii) iii) To help students who require only a few more units to graduate. To help students on provisional status to redeem themselves. The assist students who are required to repeat prerequisite courses which will not be offered in the following semester.

225

Formal lectures are not usually carried out. Teachings of courses are often done through tutorials. Long break courses are usually carried out over 4-3 weeks of tutorials and 1 week of examination during the long vacation break. The dates of these courses can be obtained from the Academic Calendar.

226

COURSE CODE Every course possesses a unique course code that consists of three (3) letters and three (3) numbers. The definition of the code is as follows:DGN nnn

Serial Number

Serial Number Level: 1 = Level 100 course 2 = Level 200 course 3 = Level 300 course

Field of specialisation: N = Nursing

G = School of Health Sciences

D = Diploma

227

EXAMINATION Examination is conducted at the end of each semester. Student must sit for the examination of all courses that they have registered during the course registration period. All students must first settle all fees due and have fulfilled teaching requirements such as attending lecture/tutorial/practicals and have fulfilled other conditions deemed necessary for that particular course before they are allowed to take the examination. The complete assessment of each course is based on the grades obtained for the continuous assessment (course work) and the final examination. The weightage given for these two components may differ from course to course. The course work can include various aspects such as students' participation in tutorials, tests, essay writing, project work and other assignments. (a) Type of Examination (i) Cognitive Component (ii) Objective Test (multiple choice) Essay Short Essay Seminar Paper Case Study

Psychomotor Component OSCE / OSPE and Practicum Clinical Skill Log Book

(iii)

Affective Component Will be assessed with (i) and (ii) through progress report from Clinical Facilitator. The aim is to evaluate students initiative and interpersonal relationship in practicum. This assessment is critical in molding the professional attitude of a student.

228

(b)

Duration of Examination Credit Unit of the Course 2 unit 2 unit 3 unit or more 3 unit or more Length of Examination Time 1 hour for courses with the course work exceeding 40% 2 hours for courses with course work of 40% or less 2 hours for courses with course work exceeding 40% 3 hours for courses with course work of 40% or less

(c)

Barring of Students from Sitting for Examination Students who do not satisfy the requirements of a course may be barred from sitting for the Final Examination of that particular course. These requirements may include attendance of lectures or tutorials and completion of all course work assignments. They can also be barred from sitting for the examination if the fees due are not paid up. Courses whereby students have been barred from are conferred grade X.

(d)

Average Grade Point System The following scale is used to grade student's performance:Grade A AB+ B BC+ C CD+ D DF Value of Grade 4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0.00

Students obtaining grade C- and below can improve their grade by repeating the course during the long semester break (KSCP). Students obtaining grade C and above are not allow to repeat courses.

229

Students' performance of each semester is shown as the "Grade Point Average" (GPA) which is calculated from the results of all courses registered in that semester. GPA is a measure of the overall academic performance of students for a particular semester. "Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is the cumulative grade obtained by students from one semester to the next. Example of GPA and CGPA calculation : Course Semester II : ABC XX1 ABC XX2 BCD XX3 CDE XX4 EFG XX5 EFG XX6 Unit 4 4 3 4 3 2 20 GPA = 43.66 = 2.18 20 Course Semester II : ABC XX7 ABB XX8 BBC XX9 BCB X10 XYZ XX1 Unit 3 4 4 4 3 18 GPA = 40.99 = 2.28 18 CGPA = 38 = 2.23 Total grade points accumulated = 43.66 + 40.99 = 84.65 Total units accumulated 20 + 18 Grade (G) D C+ C BB+ Grade Point (GP) 1.00 2.33 2.00 2.67 3.33 Total GP 3.00 9.32 8.00 10.68 9.99 40.99 Grade (G) B C+ CC D+ BGrade Point (GP) 3.00 2.33 1.67 2.00 1.33 2.67 Total GP 12.00 9.32 5.01 8.00 3.99 5.34 43.66

As shown in the above example the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point accumulated for all courses taken, divided by the total units that has been registered.

230

ACADEMIC STATUS Active Status - Students obtaining GPA 2.00 and above in the examination of a semester will be categorised as ACTIVE and will be allowed to continue their studies in the next semester. Provisional Status - A Provisional status is given to students obtaining GPA of 1.99 or less. A student designated as provisional for 3 semesters consecutively (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to continue in the academic programme of this University. However, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student maybe given a P2 status and allow to continue with his/her studies. Without prejudice to these requirements and other standing rules of examination, it should be noted that the University Examination Council has the absolute power to terminate any students from continuing their studies if their performance and grade is deemed unsatisfactory based on the minimum total credit units that must be accumulated by the student. Example:Number of Semester Minimum Total Credit Units Accumulated 35 62 98

At the End of 2nd Semester At the End of 4th Semester At the End of 6th Semester

The Examination Council of the University can also terminate students based on other specific reasons (Did not register courses, Did not obtain Examination Cards, Did not attend Examination without valid reasons), including medical reasons which can result in these students being no longer suitable to continue with their studies at this University. Examination Results a) Provisional (pass/fail) results via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) are usually announced after the Schools' board of examination meeting which is usually one month after the examination. Full results (grade) via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) will be announced after the University Examination board meeting and is usually 2 weeks after the privisional results have been announced. Official results (Semgrade) will be given to students during the 2nd week of the following semester.

b)

c)

231

NURSING SKILL PRACTICE a) Every student is compulsory to undergo practice and practicum in the nursing skills laboratory and clinical area stated for each semester. Students have to wear uniform during their practice. Students have to refer to Clinical Skill Log Book for regulation in the Nursing Skill Laboratory and clinical area. Students are to practice in Nursing Skill Laboratory with tutor or on their own as scheduled. Nursing skills practice will be observed using Nursing Skill Log Book.

b)

c)

PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester may receive the Deans List Certificate. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS Students must fulfill all requirements in order to graduate (provided the minimum residence has been fulfilled): (a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits and the required number of credits for each component in the programme [Core, Elective, University and Optional (if appropriate) courses]. Obtain a grade point of 2.00 and above for all Core courses. Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme. Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point of 2.00 for the language courses (Bahasa Malaysia and English), Ethnics Relation and TITAS courses.

(b) (c) (d)

PROGRAMME STRUCTURE The Programme was designed by taking the following into account: (i) The Malaysian Nursing Board has maintained that any nursing educational programme must have sufficient nursing skills training component for the purpose of registration with the Board.

232

To meet these requirements the Diploma in Nursing Programme is structured as follows: Student must complete 98 credit units in 3 years (semester 1-6) which include core courses (83 units) and university courses (15 units) plus other requirements of the School. Programme Structure Synopsis for Diploma in Nursing Programme Unit Requirements for Graduation PROGRAMME CORE Diploma in Nursing 83 UNIVERSITY 15 TOTAL 98

233

LIST OF CORE COURSES No. Course Code Course Title Level 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DGN 101 Professional Nursing I DGN 102 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) DGN 103 Professional Nursing II DGN 104 Health Communication DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing DGN 106 Biology for Nursing DGN 107 Nursing Practicum 1 DGN 108 Health Assessment DGN 109 Therapeutic Intervention DGN 110 Medical - Surgical Nursing I DGN 111 Human Biology I DGN 112 Nursing Practicum II Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 100 = 30 Level 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DGN 201 Human Biology II DGN 202 Medical - Surgical Nursing II DGN 203 Nursing Practicum III DGN 204 Medical - Surgical Nursing III DGN 205 Psychology for Nursing DGN 206 Mental Health for Nursing DGN 207 Nursing Practicum IV Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 200 = 21 Level 300 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DGN 301 Professional Nursing III DGN 302 Obstetric Nursing DGN 303 Gynecology Nursing DGN 304 Medical - Surgical Nursing IV DGN 305 Nursing Practicum V DGN 306 Nursing Practicum VI DGN 307 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing DGN 308 Community Nursing DGN 309 Nursing Practicum VII Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 300 = 32 Total Unit of Core Courses 4 3 2 3 2 5 3 3 7 83 4 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 Unit

234

LIST OF UNIVERSITY COURSES No. Course Code Course Title Level 100 1 2 3 LKM 400 LDN 101 WUS 101 Malay Language English Language for Nursing 1 Entrepreneuship 2 2 2 Unit

Total Unit of University Courses for Level 100 = 6 Level 200 4 5 6 7 8 HTU 223 SHE 101 LDN 201 Wxx xxx HTV 201 TITAS Ethnics Relation English Language for Nursing ll Co-Curriculum Techniques of Thinking 2 2 2 1 2

Total Unit of University Courses for Level 200 = 9 Level 300 -

Total Unit of University Courses for Level 300 = 0 Total Unit of University Courses 15

235

Registration Guidelines for the Diploma in Nursing Programme Level 100 Code Core Course Unit Code University Course Unit 2 Total Unit

DGN 101 Professional Nursing I DGN 102 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) DGN 103 Professional Nursing II DGN 104 Health Communication DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing DGN 106 Biology for Nursing DGN 107 Nursing Practicum 1

Semester 1 2 LKM 400 Malay Language 3

DGN 108 DGN 109 DGN 110 DGN 111 DGN 112

2 2 3 2 3 17 Semester II Health Assessment 3 LDN 101 English Languange Therapeutic Intervention 3 for Nursing l Medical - Surgical Nursing I 2 WUS 101 Entrepreneuship Human Biology I 2 Nursing Practicum II 3 13 Level 200

2 2 2

19

17

Code

Core Course

Unit

Code

University Course

Unit 2 2 2 1 7 2

Total Unit

DGN 201 Human Biology II DGN 202 Medical - Surgical Nursing II DGN 203 Nursing Practicum III

DGN 204 DGN 205 DGN 206 DGN 207

Semester 1 4 HTU 223 TITAS 3 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation 3 LDN 201 English Language for Nursing ll Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 10 Semester II Medical -Surgical Nursing III 3 HTV 201 Techniques of Psychology for Nursing 3 Thinking Mental Health for Nursing 2 Nursing Practicum IV 3 11

17

13

236

Level 300 Code DGN 301 DGN 302 DGN 303 DGN 304 DGN 305 Core Course Unit Code University Course Unit Total Unit

Semester 1 Professional Nursing lll 4 Obstetric Nursing 3 Gynecology Nursing 2 Medical Surgical Nursing lV 3 Nursing Practicum V 2 14 Semester II DGN 306 Nursing Practicum Vl 5 DGN 307 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing 3 DGN 308 Community Nursing 3 DGN 309 Nursing Practicum Vll 7 18 Total Unit of University Total Unit of Core Courses 83 Courses

14

18 15 98

Core Courses University Courses TOTAL

= 83 = 15 = 98

237

SEMESTER STRUCTURE DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME Year 1 Semester 1 WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACTIVITY WEEK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Year 1 Semester II ACTIVITY

LECTURE

LECTURE

MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE SPECIAL BREAK LECTURE

MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE

PRACTICUM

PRACTICUM

STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM

STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM

SEMESTER BREAK

LONG SEMESTER BREAK

238

Year 2 Semester 1 WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACTIVITY WEEK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Year 2 Semester II ACTIVITY

LECTURE

LECTURE

MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE SPECIAL BREAK LECTURE

MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE

PRACTICUM

PRACTICUM

STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM

STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM

SEMESTER BREAK

LONG SEMESTER BREAK

239

Year 3 Semester 1 WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACTIVITY WEEK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Year 3 Semester II ACTIVITY

LECTURE

LECTURE

PRACTICUM

PRACTICUM

STUDY WEEK / FINAL EXAM

STUDY WEEK / FINAL EXAM

SEMESTER BREAK

LONG SEMESTER BREAK

240

COURSES SYNOPSIS

241

Core Courses Level 100

242

DGN101/2 Professional Nursing I The course gives an introduction to nursing history, development of nursing profession nationally and internationally, health service system in Malaysia and health insurance scheme. This course also introduces basic concept and practice as well as the nurses role to the students. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Alligood, M. R. & Torney, A. M., Nursing Theory: Utilization & Application, 3rd Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2005. Herdman, T. H., Eds, NANDA International Nursing Diagnoses: Definitions & Classification 2009 2011, Wiley-Blackwell: Oxfrod, 2009. Wilkinson, J. M. & Van Leuven, K., Fundamentals of Nursing: Theory, Concepts & Applications, F.A. Davis Company: Philadelphia, 2007.

DGN102/3 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) This course includes basic nursing theory and practical component. It is designed to equipt students with basic nursing knowledge and skills to form a firm foundation to be a nurse. Students are exposed to Activities of Daily Living including basic needs eg; breathing, food and water, rest and sleep, safe environment, mobilisation, cleanliness and elimination based on Virginia Hendersons basic needs. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Altman, G. B. Fundamental and Advanced Nursing Skills, 3rd Ed., Delmar Cengage Learning: New York, 2010. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., A Critical Thinking Approach, 4th Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2004. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.

DGN103/2 Professional Nursing II This course introduces students to ethical and legal issues in nursing practice. It also emphasises on application of nursing process to fulfill patients needs. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bosek, M. S. D. & Savage, T. A., The Ethical Component of Nursing Education: Integrating Ethics Into Clinical Experience, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007. Holmes, H. N., Evidence-based Nursing Guide to: Legal and Professional Issues, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2009. Westrick, A. J. & Dempski, K., Essentials of Nursing Law and Ethics, Jones & Bartlett Publishers: Sudbury, 2009.

243

DGN104/2 Health Communication This course introduces interpersonal, group and public communication theory and skills. Students will take part in assignment presentation to enhance their confidence to interact with others. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Burnard, P. & Gill, P., Culture, Communication and Nursing, Pearson/Education: Harlow, 2008. Crawford, P., Brown, B. & Bonham, P., Communication in Clinical Setting, Nelson Thornes: Cheltenham, 2006. Singh, S., Communication for Nurses, Anmol Publications: New Delhi, 2006.

DGN105/3 Sociology in Nursing This course exposes students to the sociology role in health service, its influence and effect on behaviour and response to health alteration and disease to students. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Andersen, M. L. & Taylor, H. F., Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society, Wadsworth: Australia, 2000. Denny, E. & Earle, S., Sociology for Nurses, Polity Press: Malden, 2005. Giger, J. N. & Davidhizar, R. E., Eds, Transcultural Nursing: Assessment and Intervention, 5th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2008.

DGN106/2 Biology for Nursing This course discusses important aspect of basic biochemistry, functions and its importance in human body. Discussion includes basic microbiology, principal of paracytology and immunology and effect on human body. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Campbell, M. K. & Farrell, S. O., Biochemistry, 5th Ed., Thomson Brook: USA, 2006. Elaine, M. N., Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson: San Francisco, 2006. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B., Introduction to the Human Body: The Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons: New York, 2007.

244

DGN107/3 Nursing Practicum I This practicum course requires students to apply basic nursing skills, concept and theory, e.g. Virginia Hendersons basic needs and communication skills learned in nursing skill laboratory. Students are trained to develop their skills in the clinical area. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. DeWit, S. C., Fundamental Concept and Skill for Nursing, 2nd Ed., Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2005. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, 7th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2009. Rusnah, A. R. & Saliza M. L., Prosedur Kejururawatan, Prentice Hall: Malaysia, 2006.

DGN108/3 Health Assessment This course focuses on basic nursing practical aspect including nursing process, health assessment objective and method, history taking, clinical examination method, assessing and interpreting signs and symptoms of diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 4. Elkin, M. K., Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A., Nursing Interventions & Clinical Skills, 4th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2007. Gaylane, A., Delmars Physical Assessment Skill, Delmar Learning: New York, 2004. Wilson, S. F. & Giddens, J. F., Health Assessment for Nursing Practice, 4th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2009.

DGN109/3 Therapeutic Intervention The aim of this course is to give necessary knowledge regarding therapeutic interventions that are important in patients management in ward. Aseptic concept and technique, wound management, pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, drug interaction, drug administration based on 8R concept, important aspect of therapeutic diet, patients management, counseling technique and introduction to alternative technique in patient care are taught. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lilley, L. L., Harrington, S. & Synder, J. S., Pharmacology and The Nursing Process, 4th Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2005. Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A., Clinical Nursing Skill & Techniques, 5th Ed., Mosby: USA, 2004. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.

245

DGN110/2 Medical-Surgical Nursing I This course is an introduction to clinical nursing in the hospital. It emphasises on nursing role and responsibility in patients management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006. Linton, A. D., Introduction to Medical Surgical Nursing, 4th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2007. Timby, B. K. & Smith, N. E., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing, 9th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007.

DGN111/2 Human Biology I This course discusses the structure and physiology of hematology, immune, respiratory and cardiovascular system. List of text/reference books: 1. Clancy, J. & McVicar, A. J., Physiology and Anatomy for Nurses and Healthcare Practitioners: A Homeostatic Approach, 3rd Ed., Hodder Arnold: London, 2009. Elaine, M. N., Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson: San Francisco, 2006. Saladin, K. S., Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5th Ed., McGraw-Hill: New York, 2010.

2. 3.

DGN112/3 Nursing Practicum II This course includes application of basic nursing skill concept and theory of medicalsurgical nursing such as perioperative, physical assessment and nursing process learned in nursing skill laboratory. Students are expected to develop their skills in clinical area. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Castillo, S. L. M., Strategies, Techniques and Approaches to Thinking: Critical Thinking Cases in Nursing, 4th Ed., Saunders: Edinburgh, 2010. Harkreader, H. C., Hogan, M. A. & Thobaden, M., Fundamentals of Nursing: Caring and Clinical Judgement, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2007. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Basic Nursing: A Critical Thinking Approach, 4th Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2004.

246

Core Courses Level 200

247

DGN201/4 Human Biology II This course discussses the important structure and function of gastrointestinal, urinary, endocrine, nervous, eye, ear, nose and throat, integumentary and musculoskeletal system. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Martini, F., Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson Benjamin Cummings: San Francisco, 2009. Moore, K. L. & Dalley, A. F., Clinically Oriented Anatomy, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2006. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B. H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, 12th Ed., John Wiley: New Jersey, 2009.

DGN202/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing II This course introduces students to basic concept of medical-surgical nursing practice.The course emphasises on application of nursing process to fulfill patients need in management of patient with respiratory, cardiovascular and hematology problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Black, J. M. & Hawks, J. H., Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical Management for Positive Outcome, 8th Ed., Saunders: Philadelphia, 2009. Burke, K. M., LeMone, P. & Moha-Brown, E. L., Medical-Surgical Nursing Care, 2nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2007. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.

DGN203/3 Nursing Practicum III This course includes the application of nursing skills in respiratory, cardiovascular and hematology system. Students need to practice drug administration and diagnostic management. The course also exposes students to perioperative management of patient with respiratory, cardiovascular and hematology problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. DeWit, S. C., Fundamental Concepts and Skills For Nursing, 2nd Ed., Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2005. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006.

3.

248

DGN204/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing III This course covers the five sections of body system which include gastrointestinal, endocrine, immunology, oncology and urinary. Medical and surgical nursing interventions for each section are taught to students. Students will be exposed to skills that need to be applied for medical and surgical problems of the particular system. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Ignatavicius, D. D. & Workman M. L., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: Philadelphia, 2006. Sholtis, B. L., Smith, S. D. & Connell, S. S., Brunner & Suddaths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Smeltzer, S. C. et al, Eds, Brunner & Suddaths Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008.

3.

DGN205/3 Psychology for Nursing This course aims to build a thorough understanding of important theories and concepts in psychology. It also emphasises on psychological development principasl and recovery strategies in nursing management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Andrews, M. & Boyle, J., Eds, Transcultural Concepts in Nursing Care, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Plante, T. G., Contemporary Clinical Psychology, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons: New Jersey, 2005. Sternberg, R. J., Psychology: In Search of The Human Mind, 3rd Ed., Harcourt College Publishers: Philadelphia, 2002.

DGN206/2 Mental Health for Nursing This course exposes the students to mental disorder and its nursing management. Students also will be exposed to mental health services in Malaysia; hospital and community, nurses and mental health group role, management and treatment of patient with mental health problem. List of text/reference books: 1. Ankner, G. M., Clinical Decision Making: Case Studies in Medical-Surgical Pharmacologic and Psychiatric Nursing, Delmar Cengage Learning: New York, 2009. Womble, D. M., Introductory Mental Health Nursing, 1st Ed., Lippincott: Philadelphia, 2005.

2.

249

3.

Varcolis, E. M. & Jordan, M., Eds, Foundations of Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing: A Clinical Approach, 6th Ed., Saunders/Elsevier: St. Louis, 2010.

DGN207/3 Nursing Practicum IV This practicum course requires the application of nursing skills according to gastroinstestinal, endocrine, immunology, oncology, mental health and psychiatric problems. Students are expected to develop their nursing skills in clinical area. The course also exposes student to perioperative management of patient having above problems. List of text/reference books: 1. DeWit, S. C., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, 2nd Ed., Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2005. Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008.

2.
3.

250

Core Courses Level 300

251

DGN301/4 Professional Nursing lll This course emphasises the knowledge on management theory, principal and evaluation methods, research, teaching and basic informatics technology in health nursing. The knowledge and skills will be applied during nursing practicum. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. DeYoung, S., Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators, Prentice-Hall: New Jersey, 2007. Finkelman, A. W., Leadership and Management in Nursing, Pearson: New Jersey, 2008. Hannah, K. J., Ball, M. J. & Edwards, M. J. A., Introduction to Nursing Informatics, 3rd Ed., Springer: New York, 2006. LoBiondo-Wood, G. & Haber, J., Nursing Research: Methods and Critical Appraisal for Evidence-based Practice, 6th Ed., Mosby: Missouri, 2006.

DGN302/3 Obstetric Nursing This course emphasises knowledge in maternal and child health throughout pregnancy, labor, birth and puerperium. The students will acquire the necessary skills for neonate management, pos natal care and recognise the importance of health education through this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Leifer, S. M. & Hartston, D. P., An Introductory Text to Maternity Nursing, Saunders: London, 2005. Liewellyn-Jones, D., Abraham, S. & Oats, J., Fundamentals of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 8th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2005. Klossner, N. J., Introductory Maternity Nursing, Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2006.

DGN303/2 Gynecology Nursing This course is designed to provide the core knowledge and skills in reproductive and sexual problem management to nursing students. List of text/reference books: 1. Beckmann, C. R. B., Ling, F. W., Smith, R. P., Barzansky, B. M., Herbert, W.N. P. & Laube, D. W., Obstetric and Gynaecology, 5th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins: USA, 2006. Magowan, B., Obstetric and Gynaecology, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Churchill Livingstone: New York, 2005. Sokol, A. I. & Sokol, E. R., General Gynaecology: The Requisites in Obstetric and Gynaecology, Mosby: New York, 2007.

2. 3.

252

DGN304/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing lV This course provides clinical knowledge and skills to students on medical-surgical nursing of neurology, integumentary, special senses and musculoskeletal problems. Etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, medical treatment and nursing management will be emphasised. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Smeltzer, S. C. et al., Eds, Brunner & Suddaths Text Book of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Vijayalaksmi, V. G., Medical-Surgical Nursing, Jaypee Brothers: New Delhi, 2007.

DGN305/2 Practicum Nursing V This practicum covers bothe the theory and skills of nursing skills and management concept in health service promotion of primary, secondary and tertiary in clinic, disable people centre, orphanages, old folk home, rehabilitation centre and house visits. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006. Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008. Sweet, H. M. & Dougall, R., Community Nursing and Primary Healthcare in Twentieth-century Britain, Routledge: New York, 2008.

DGN306/5 - Practicum Nursing VI This practicum course covers skills and theory of medical-surgical nursing management concept related to obstetrics, gynecology, orthopedic, neurology, ophthalmology, ear, nose and throat problems. Students also learn ethical and law, clinical mapping concept and nursing management of the above problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bull, P. D., Lecture Notes: Disease of The Ear, Nose and Throat, Blackwell: Maiden, 2007. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Liewellyn-Jones, D., Abraham, S. & Oats, J., Fundamentals of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 8th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2005.

253

4. 5. 6.

Galloway, N. R., Amoaku, W. M. K., Galloway, P. H. & Browing, A. C., Common Eye Diseases and Their Management, 3rd Ed., Springer: London, 2006. Pope, N. A., Musculoskeletal Disorders in the Workplace: Principles and Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2007. Pourmand, R., Practicing Neurology: What you need to know, what you need to do, Humana Press: USA, 2008.

DGN307/3 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing This course discusses neonate and pediatric nursing, the contents include medicalsurgical, diagnostic, complication and holistic nursing. The students also acruire clinical experience at nursing skill laboratory and clinical area. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ball, J. W. & Bindler, R. C., Pediatric Nursing: Caring for Children, Pearson Prentice Hall: USA, 2008. Bowden, V. R. & Greenberg, C. S., Pediatric Nursing Procedure, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: USA, 2008. Leifer, G., Introduction to Maternity and Pediatric Nursing, 5th Ed., Elsevier: St Louis, 2007.

DGN308/3 Community Nursing This course will expose students to nursing management related to family and society. The students clinical skills will be enhanced through practical sessions in community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gauwitz, D. F., Community Health Nursing, Thomson Delmar Learning: New York, 2007. Marcia, S., Foundation Of Nursing In The Community: Community Oriented Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2006. Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008.

DGN309/7 Nursing Practicum VlI This course contains concepts of basic skills and nursing theories, specific skills in gynecology, neonatal, pediatric, critical unit, operation theatre and community. The students are expected to build their nursing skills in the clinical area. List of text/reference books: 1. Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006.

254

2. 3. 4.

DeWitt, S. C., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, 2nd Ed., Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2005. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008.

255

FACILITIES AVAILABLE AT THE SCHOOL Hospital Universiti Sains Malaysia This hospital consists 731 beds from 32 wards from various disciplines including medical, surgical, orthopedic, critical, obstetric and gynecology, psychiatric, cardiology, cardiothorasic, oncology and pediatric. Services available include: Medical Specialist Clinic Surgery Clinic Obstetric And Gynecology Clinic Orthopedic Clinic Psychiatric Clinic Ophthalmology Clinic Otorhinolaryngology Clinic Oncology Clinic Outpatient Clinic (Klinik Rawatan Keluarga) Staff Clinic Klinik Sejahtera (for USM students) Dental Clinic Radiology Services Diagnostic Laboratory Services Clinical Laboratory Services Blood Bank Services Pharmacy Services

256

Library Facilities include: Open rack books, reference books, magazine including permanent subscription, serial monography, special collection, fiction collection and gift books Media materials

The School of Health Sciences' building The buildings of the School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipments. IT facilities and MultiMedia IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the MultiMedia Laboratories of the School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11:30 pm. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SCHOOL CAREER GUIDANCE PROFESSION Diploma Nursing USM sponsored who graduate and registered with Malaysian Nursing Board will be considered to a U29 post at USM for a certain period. SOCIETY School of Health Sciences students automatically become the members of the Health Science Society of the University.

257

INDEX
BIOMEDICINE GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioural Science (108) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTB105/3 - Human Biochemistry (99) GTB106/3 - Laboratory Science (99) GTB107/3 Epidemiology (100) GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (107) GTB217/2 - Immunology I (115) GTB204/3 - Molecular Biology Techniques (114) GTB218/3 - Immunology II (116) GTB212/3 - Basic Microbiology (115) GTB219/3 - Pharmacology I (117) GTB221/3 - Basic Hematology (118) GTB222/4 Pathology (118) GTB310/3 - Clinical Biochemistry (142) GTB315/2 - Medical Virology and Micology (143) GTB307/3 - Medical Parasitology (142) GTB318/3 - Pharmacology II (144) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTB316/3 - Transfusion Science and Blood Banking (143) GTB317/3 - Clinical and Laboratory Haematology (144) GTB407/4 - Industrial Training (175) GTB408/9 - Biomedical Practicum (176) GTB409/4 - Research Project (176) GTB404/3 Toxicology (175) GTB410/3 - Laboratory Management (177) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals (42) GTB224/2 - Laboratory Animal Sciences (119) )

258

GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) DIETETICS GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU103/3 - Fundamental of Health Informatics (103) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Sciences (108) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for the Healthcare Professional (42) GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) GTN101/3 - Food Science (104)

GTB220/3 - Medical Bacteriology (117)

GTN301/3 - Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum (158) GTN309/3 - Nutrition and Diseases (159)

GTD311/3 - Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I (146) GTN310/2 - Food and Nutritional Toxicology (159) GTD308/3 - Therapeutic Diet Preparation (145) GTD315/2 - Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II (146) GTN311/3 - Food Service Management (159) GTD211/2 - Dietetics and Communication Skills (119) GTD318/4 - Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I (147) GTD310/4 - Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I (145) GTD317/4 - Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I (146) GTN401/3 - Food Service and Industry Practicum (185)

GTN202/3 - Principles of Food Preparation (128) GTN207/3 - Principles of Nutrition (129)

GTN208/3 - Nutritional Biochemistry (129 ) GTN209/3 - Nutrition in the Life Cycle (130 )

259

GTN210/2 - Nutrition for Health and Fitness (130) GTN211/3 - Food Analysis (130) GTN212/3 - Assessment of Nutritional Status (131) GTD408/3 - Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II (178) NURSING GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Human I (106) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTU105/3 - Psychology Behavioral Science (108) and

GTD406/3 - Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II (177) GTN407/3 - Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar (186) GTD407/3 - Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II (178)

GTB212/3 - Basic Microbiology (115) GTJ205/4 - Nursing Foundation III (124) GTJ207/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) (124) GTJ208/2 - Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing (125) GTJ209/3 - Nursing Foundation II (125) GTJ210/3 - Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing (126) GTJ211/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) (126) GTJ212/2 - Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing (126) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTJ309/2 - Critical Care Nursing (151)

GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Human II (108) GTB105/3 - Human Biochemistry (99) GTB107/3 Epidemiology (100) GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (103) GTJ101/4 - Nursing Foundation I (102) GTU201/2 - Community and Health (137) GTJ108/2 - Health Communication and Education (103)

260

GTB203/1 - Basic Immunology (43) GTB211/3 Biostatistics (58) GTB214/3 - Basic Pharmacology (58) GTJ312/6 - Research Project (one academic year) (153) GTJ313/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) (153) GTJ314/2 - Nursing Education (153) GTJ315/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Hematology and Oncology) (154) GTJ316/2 - Gerontology Nursing (154) FORENSIC SCIENCE GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTF103/3 - Physical Chemistry (100) GTF104/3 - Inorganic Chemistry (100) GTF105/2 - General Chemistry Practical I (101)

GTJ310/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) (152) GTJ311/2 - Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing (152) GTJ405/5 - Medical Nursing Practicum (181) GTJ406/4 - Surgical Nursing Practicum (181) GTJ407/4 - Community and Critical Care Nursing Practicum (182) GTJ408/4 - Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum (182) GTJ317/2 - Principles of Health Management (155) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (42)

GTF200/3 Criminalistic(120) GTF203/2 Criminology (120) GTF204/3 - Psychology Forensic (121) GTF205/3 - Analytical Chemistry II (121) GTF206/3 - Organic Chemistry II (122) GTF207/2 - Analytical Chemistry Practical (122)

261

GTF106/3 - Analytical Chemistry I (101) GTF107/3 - Organic Chemistry I (101) GTF108/2 - General Chemistry Practical II (102) GTB204/3 - Molecular BiologyTechniques (114) GTU302/3 Biostatistic (168) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTF300/2 - Biological Evidence (147) GTF301/3 - Physical Evidence (148) GTF305/4 - Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drug (148) GTF306/3 - Fire Investigation (149) GTF309/3 - Forensic DNA Analysis (149) GTF311/3 - Forensic Anthropology (150) MEDICAL RADIATION GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU103/3 - Fundamental of Health Informatics (107) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Sciences (108)

GTF208/2 - Organic Chemistry Practical (122) GTF209/2 - Chemistry of Pollutions and Environment (123) GTF210/3 - Material Chemistry (123) GTF211/2 - Natural Products Chemistry (124) GTF312/3 - Organic Chemistry III (150) GTF313/3 - Food Chemistry (150) GTF314/2 - Forensic Serology (151) GTF400/2 - Forensic Medicine (178) GTF402/4 - Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives (179) GTF406/6 - Research Project (179) GTF407/8 - Forensic Practicum (180) GTF408/2 - Examination of Questioned Documents (180)

GTX210/3 - Medical Radiation Physics II (137) GTX212/3 - Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics (137) GTX213/3 - Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine (138) GTX214/3 - Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology (138)

262

GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTX101/3 - Introduction to Medical Radiation (109) GTX102/3 - Mathematics of Radiation Science (109) GTX103/3 - Medical Radiation Physics I (110) GTX307/3 - Radiation Protection and Safety II (169) GTX314/2 - Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry (170) GTX316/3 - Diagnostic Radiology Imaging (170) GTX317/3 - Nuclear Medicine Imaging (170) GTX319/4 - Imaging Techniques I (171) GTX320/3 - Principles of Radiotherapy (171) GTX402/2 Brachytherapy (194) GTX405/2 - Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I (194) AUDIOLOGY GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Science (108)

GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (42) GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTX302/2 - Radiation Protection and Safety I (169) GTX406/6 - Research Project (194) GTX407/3 - Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II (194) GTX408/3 - Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy (195) GTX410/4 - Imaging Techniques II (195) GTX411/4 - Radiotherapy Techniques (195) GTX412/3 - Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques (196) GTX413/3 - Professional Training (196)

GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (107) GTA103/2 - Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) (98)

263

GTA101/2 - Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech (98) GTA102/3 - Physics for Audiologist (98)

GTP102/2 - Basic Linguistics (105) GTP103/2 - Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology (105) GTP104/3 - Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing (105) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) WUS101/2 Entrepreneurship (71) WSCxxx/1 - Co-curriculum (Sports) (71) GTB107/3 Epidemiology (100) GTJ108/2 - Health Communication and Education (103) WSCxxx/1 - Co-curriculum (Sports) (71)

GTP101/2 - Child Language Development (104) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137) LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV (71) HTU223/2 - TITAS (Islamic and Asian Civilization) (71) LSP300/2 - Academic English (71) GTA201/2 - Audiology Instrumentation (112) GTA202/3 - Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques (112) GTP202/3 - Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders (132) GTP204/2 - Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology (132) GTP205/2 - Speech Acoustics and Phonetics (133) GTA203/3 - Advanced Audiology Technique (112) GTA204/2 - Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening (113) GTA205/2 - Neurology for Hearing and Speech (113)

GTA301/3 - Basic Hearing Amplification Technology (140) GTA302/3 - Audiology Clinic I (140) GTA303/3 - Paediatric Audiology (140) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (42) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTA304/4 - Audiology Clinic II (141)

264

GTJ317/2 - Principles of Health Management (155) SHE101/2 - Ethnics Relation (72) WCCxxx/1 - Co-curriculum (Cultural) (72) LSP402/2 - Scientific and Medical English (72) GTA206/2 Otology (113) GTA207/2 - Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System (114) GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) GTP407/2 - Learning Disabilities (188) GEG304/2 - Communication and Self Development (72) SPEECH PATHOLOGY GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Human I (106) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Science (108) GTP101/2 - Child Language Development (104) GTA101/2 - Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech (98) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Human II (108)

GTA305/3 - Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology (141) GTA306/3 - Auditory Rehabilitation (141) GTP305/2 - Counselling for Special Population (72) GEG203/2 - Health Economy (201) GTA401/6 - Research Project (173) GTA402/3 - Noise and Hearing (173) GTA403/5 - Audiology Clinic III (173) GTA404/2 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (174) GTA405/5 - Audiology Clinic IV (174)

GTP203/2 - Speech Pathology Clinic I (132) GTP204/2 - Pediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology (132) GTP205/2 - Speech Acoustic and Phonetics (133) GTA202/3 - Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique (112) GTP206/1 - Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology (133)

265

GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (107) GTP102/2 - Basic Linguistics (105) GTP103/2 - Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology (105) GTP104/3 - Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing (105) GTA103/2 - Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and Throat) (98) GTP201/2 - Linguistics for Speech Pathology (131) GTP202/3 - Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders (132) GTP303/2 - Neuropsychology (161) GTP304/3 - Speech Pathology Clinic III (163) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (162) GTP309/3 - Hearing Impairment (165) GTP305/2 - Counselling for Special Population (163) GTP306/3 - Voice and Resonance Disorders (163) GTP307/3 - Acquired Communication Disorders (164) GTP308/4 - Speech Pathology Clinic IV (164)

GTP207/2 - Speech Pathology Clinic II (133) GTP208/3 - Speech Disorders (134) GTA205/2 - Neurology for Hearing and Speech (113) GTA206/2 - Otology (113) GTU302/3 - Biostatistics (162) GTP301/2 - Psycholinguistics (161) GTP302/2 - Language Disorders (161) GTP310/2 - Speech Pathology Clinical Placement (165) GTP401/2 - Augmentative and Alternative Communication (186) GTP402/6 - Research Project (187) GTP403/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic V (187) GTP404/2 - Swallowing Problems (187) GTP407/2 - Learning Disabilities (188) GTP406/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic VI (188)

266

EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Science (108) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTS101/2 - Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science (106) GTS102/3 - Sociology and Philosophy of Sports (106) GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (107) GTS206/3 - Sports Training Methodology (136) GTS207/3 - Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports (136) GTN207/3 - Principles of Nutrition (129) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (42) GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTS301/3 - Sports Nutrition (165) GTS302/2 - Motor Learning (166) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137) GTB217/2 - Immunology I (115) GTS201/3 - Exercise Physiology (134) GTS202/2 - First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) (135) GTS203/2 Kinanthropometry (135) GTS204/2 - Tests and Measurements for Sports Science (135) GTS205/3 - Sports Psychology (136) GTS305/2 - Applied Sports Physiology (167) GTS306/3 - Coaching Science and Performance Analysis (167) GTS307/3 - Lifespan, Growth and Development (168) GTS401/3 - Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription (191) GTS402/6 - Research Projects (192) GTS403/4 - Industrial Training (192) GTS404/2 - Lifetime Wellness and Leisure Activities (192) GTS405/3 - Sports Management (192)

267

GTS303/3 - Sports Injuries and Rehabilition (166) GTS304/3 - Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology (167) NUTRITION GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Science (108) GTU103/3 - Fundamental of Health Informatics (107) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137) GTU302/3 Biostatistics (168) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTN210/2 - Nutrition for Health and Fitness (130) GTN211/3 - Food Analysis (130) GTN212/3 - Assessment of Nutritional Status (131) GTN301/3 - Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum (158) GTN309/3 - Nutrition and Diseases (159) GTN310/2 - Food and Nutrition Toxicology (159)

GTS406/3 - Adapted Physical Activity (193) GTS407/3 - Therapeutic Exercises (193)

GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals (42) GTB107/3 Epidemiology (100) GTN101/3 - Food Science (104) GTN202/3 - Principle of Food Preparation (128) GTN207/3 - Principle of Nutrition (129) GTN208/3 - Nutrition Biochemistry (129) GTN209/3 - Nutrition in the Life Cycle (130) GTN401/3 - Food Services and Industry Practicum (185) GTN403/6 - Research Project in Nutrition (185) GTN405/3 - Current Issues in Nutrition (185) GTN407/3 - Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars (186) GTD211/3 - Dietetic and Communication Skills (119) GTD311/3 - Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I (146)

268

GTN311/3 - Food Service Management (159) GTN312/3 - Food Microbiology (160)

GTD315/2 - Principles in Medical Nutrition Therapy II (146) GTN314/2 - Nutrition Anthropology (160)

ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH GTK101/3 - Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health (103) GTK102/3 - Environmental and Occupational Health from Ecological Perspectives (103) GTK103/3 Biodiversity (104) GTK302/3 - Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives (156) GTK303/3 - Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management (156) GTK304/3 - Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminated Materials (156) GTK305/3 - Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases (157) GTK306/3 - Environmental and Occupational Emergency (157) GTK307/3 - Occupational Rehabilitation (158) GTK301/4 - Environmental and Occupational Toxicology (155) GTU301/3 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (42) GTU302/3 Biostatistic (168) GTU303/2 - Research Methodology (169) GTK401/4 - Environmental and Occupational Laws (183) GTK402/3 - Environmental Management (183)

GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (106) GTU103/3 - Fundamental of Health Informatics (107) GTU104/3 - Structure and Function of Humans II (108) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioral Science (108) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (109) GTB106/3 - Laboratory Science (99) GTF101/3 - Basic Chemistry (43) GTB107/3 - Epidemiology (100) GTK202/3 - Pollution and Health (127)

269

GTK203/3 - Occupational Health (128) GTK201/3 - Occupational Health (127) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (137)

GTK403/3 - Safety and Occupational Health Management (184) GTK404/8 - Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum (184) GTK405/8 - Research Project (184)

270

Diploma of Nursing DGN 101 - Professional Nursing I (243) DGN 102 - Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) (243) DGN 203 - Nursing Practicum III (248) DGN 204 - Medical - Surgical Nursing III (249) DGN 205 - Psychology for Nursing (249) DGN 206 - Mental Health for Nursing (249) DGN 207 - Nursing Practicum IV (250) DGN 301 - Professional Nursing III (252) DGN 302 - Obstetric Nursing (252) DGN 303 - Gynecology Nursing (252) DGN 304 - Medical - Surgical Nursing IV (253) DGN 305 - Nursing Practicum V (253) DGN 306 - Nursing Practicum VI (253) DGN 307 - Neonate and Pediatric Nursing (254) DGN 308 - Community Nursing (254) DGN 309 - Nursing Practicum VII (254)

DGN 103 - Professional Nursing II (243) DGN 104 - Health Communication (244) DGN 105 - Sociology in Nursing (244) DGN 106 - Biology for Nursing (244) DGN 107 - Nursing Practicum 1 (245) DGN 108 - Health Assessment (245) DGN 109 - Therapeutic Intervention (245) DGN 110 - Medical - Surgical Nursing I (246) DGN 111 - Human Biology I (246) DGN 112 - Nursing Practicum II (246) DGN 201 - Human Biology II (248) DGN 202 - Medical - Surgical Nursing II (248)

271

STUDENTS FEEDBACK The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students response regarding the content of this guidebook. This information will be useful for the university in improving this guidebook. Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale.
1 - Strongly Disagree 2 - Disagree 3 - Agree 4 - Strongly Agree

Please circle the number. 1. This guidebook is very useful.

1 2 3 4

2.

The information provided in this guidebook is accurate.

1 2 3 4

If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the pages(s) that contain the inaccurate information.

3.

The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand.

1 2 3 4

4.

Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good.

1 2 3 4

5.

I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook.

1 2 3 4

6.

If there is any other information that you think should be included in the guidebook, please suggest in the space below.

Please send this feedback form to Schools General Office in the 4th week of Semester I, Academic Session 2010/2011

272